An Elementary Grammar Ofthe Latin Language

AN ELEMENTARY GRAMMAR

OF THE

LATIN LANGUAGE

FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS

BY BENJAMINHALL KENNEDY, DI) .

CANON OF ELY

N E W E D I T I O N

L ONGM A NS, G R E E N,A ND 0 0 .

3 9 P A T E RNO ST E R R OW,L ONDON

NEW YORK AND BOMBAY

Aw e”

PREFACE

THE TH IRD EDIT ION.

Tn distinctive features of this Elementary LatinGrammar, ascompared w ith that ofLilly, may be stated as follows.

I. Accideiweq— l . Quantity is briefly noticed inthe first chapter,and the quantities of Latinwords are marked throughout ; thusthe learner is impressed with the importance of pronunciation, andprepared for the study ofProsody. 2 . The Adjective is set down

as a distinct part of speech , instead of theParticiple. 3. The use

of the Pronoun hie, hwc, hoc, in the declension of Nouns is dis

pensed w ith as unnecessary, all that it is intended to teach beingsupplied by judicious Praxis. (See the Chi ld

’

s Latin4. The term Conjunctive Mood is adopted from the best modernwriters, its special uses (Potential, Subjunctive, being re

served for explanation in the Syntax . 5 . The Participle, or

Gerundive, in dus has been deprived of the name of -Future, to

which it certainly has no claim . 6 . The Future Perfect in ro has

been removed from the Conjunctive to its proper place inthe Indicative Mood. 7 . The Tenses are translated by one signonly, the

other English signs being afterwards specially noticed. Inlikemanner, the varying forms, ere for erunt, re for ris,f ui for sum, &c .

,

are om itted inthe paradigms, and speciallynoticed ina subsequentplace. It is hoped thatthe paradigms have beenmade easier to the

learner by these changes, and also by the synoptical form inwhich

they are printed. 8 The old memorial hexameters for genders of

Nouns, fiexionofVerbs, &c., are replaced. by rhym ing Latin lines

JV PREFACE.

inoctosyllabic rhythm ,which are learnt (as theAuthor has found)

w ith infinitely greater ease, remembered quite as w ell,and applied

w ith at least equal readiness. In adopting this alteration, the

Author has followed not only the dictates of his own judgment,but also the general practice ofContinental School Grammars.

II. Smaller Syntax and FirstRules of Constrm’

ng .—These rules

are intended to introduce the beginner to the practice of construingsimple sentences

,before he enters upon the further study of

Syntax.

III. Inthe larger Syntax, the Author has applied the improvedprinciples ofmodernphilology to the memorial system of instruc

tion. He has chosenLatinrules onaccount of their superior conciseness ; and, while he has made the individual rules short and

clear enough for memorial citation, he has also adhered as nearly as

hemight to philosophical accuracy intheir arrangement ; follow ing

the growth of the sentence from its simplest to its complex forms,

and carefully explaining the distinctionbetw een the simple and

compound sentence, as also betweenthe several kinds of compound

sentences. It is only by anaccurate understanding of these dis

tinctions that a learner canthoroughly master the doctrine of the

Subjunctive mood, so eminently important inLatin; and, how

easily and perfectly itcanbemastered by the method here adopted,

the Author knows from long experience. By the Second Part of

this Syntax 180— 200) the Author is w illing that the merits

of thi sGrammar should be tested : it being remembered that boysare not supposed to study those rules until they are practically

grounded inthe Syntaxis Minor. It has not beenthoughtneces

sary to append a translationof the higher Syntax.

IV. The elementary rules of Prosody are thrown into the form

ofmemorial Latinverses. This planis appropriate to the subject

itself, and suited to learners who have alreadymade some progress

inthe language. Although it has beenimpossible inthese verses

to avoid occasional deviations from approved rhythm, yet, it will

PREFACE . V

be found that the objectionable lines do not form so much as one

tenth part of the whole number ; while of verses decidedly inhar

monious there are only 5 or 6 outof 225 and eventhese may be

turned to advantage, as examples of what should be avoided in

rhythm .

The Author has never departed f rom the usual Grammatical

Nomenclature, except for powerful reasons . In addition to the

instances before mentioned, he w ishes to draw the attention 01

scholars to the great advantage of the term Copulative Verbs, as

applied by him to the class ofVerbs (sum , fio, videor, vocor,

which coup le a Subj ect and aNom inalPredicate . He isnot aware

that any collective term has heretofore beeninvented for them

and the Syntax rules affecting them have beenconsequently vague

and loose. Inorder to appropriate here the word Copulative, theAuthor has given to et, que, &c., the name of Socz

'

atz'

ve Conjunc

tions,and to act, eel, &c., that ofDissociative terms also better in

themselves thanCopulajive and Difiunctz’

ve.

LATIN GRAMMAR .

ACCIDENCE, OR WORD-FORMATION.

SIGNS OF SPEECH .

l . GRAMMAR teaches the rules of speech . LatinGrammar»teaches the rules of the Latin speech, Which was

spokenby the ancient Romans.

5 2. The Parts of Speech are Words : and the elements of

Words are Letters .

The LatinLETTERS are twenty-five, being the same as

the English WithoutW.

Capitals : A , B , C,I)

,E

, F,G

,H

, LJ , K ,L, M,

N,O

,

P, Q, R, S, T, U, V,

X,Y , Z .

Small : 3 ) by 0, do 6 , fa g, h ) i, j , k) p: q, I“ S, l'

u,v,x, y, 2 .

Six of the Letters are VOCALES,Vowels, self-sounding ,

a, e, i , o, u, y : the rest are CONSONANTE S

, Conso ‘

nants, Wt h cannot be sounded Without a vowel.

5. CONSONANTS are divided into Liquids, Double Conso~nants, and Mutes.

The Liquids are l, m, n, r ; Double Consonants, x, 2 ;the rest are Mutes.

B

2 ACCIDENCE.

6 A SYLLABLE consists of one or more letters pronouncedinone breath as i -lex.

A DIPHTHONG is the sound of two vowels meeting inone syllable.

There are three usual dlphthOHgS, ao, oe, an; and

three seldom used, ai, ei, eu.

Every Syllable is considered SHOR T or LONGquantity, according as its vowel is short or long .

Short by nature, as amor.

Long by nature, as esu.

A Vowel Shortby positionbefore anothermay be vow el, as pies.

Long by positionbefore two consonants or a double consonant, as pernox.

Obs . A ll diphthongs are long ; as caddi e.

8. PUNCTA , the Signs ofPunctuation, or Stops, are the sameinLatinas inEnglish Comma Semicolon

Colon(z) Full Stop Note of InterrogationNote of Admiration( l)

PARTS OF SPEECH.

59 . THE PARTS or SPEECH , orWords, are of three kinds

I. NOMINA , Nouns which are threefold

NOMINA SUBSTANTWA, Nouns Substantive, or

names of persons and things : as, Caesar ,Caesar ovum ,

anegg ; virtii s, vi rtue.

NOMINA ADJ ECTIVA , Nouns A djective ; w hichexpress the qualities of persons and things

as, clarii s, illustrious grandi s, la rge ; liber,

f ree.

(3) PRONOMINA, Pronouns ; which are used to avoid

onWORD-FORMATION. 3

the frequent repetitionof Substantives : as,

égo, I ti'

i,thou ille, he qui, who.

Note. Names of persons and places,

are called Proper Names

other Substantives are called CommonNouns, or Appellatives.

II. VERBA, Verbs ; which express what persons andthings do, suffer, or are : as, Caesar oé

’

nit, Caesa r comes ; virtiis laudatiir, virtue is praised

6vum‘

est grande, the egg is large;

PARTICULE,Particles ; which are four-fold

(l .) ADVERBIA , A dverbs ; which express the quali

ties of verbs or adjectives : as, bone, well ;céléritér, quickly niino, now.

(2) PRE POSITIONES, Prepositions ; which express therelations ofnouns to each other as

, Caesar inItaliam venit, Ce sa r comes into Ita ly.

(3) CONJ UNCTIONES, Conjunctions ; which connectthe other parts of speech : as, ago i t Cé sar,I and Ce sar venit iit laudetl

‘

ir, he comes that

he may be p ra ised.

(4) INTERJ ECTIONES, Interjections ; words of excla

mation: as, heii , eheu,hei , vé , a las hens.

ha I 0 , oh 1 611, 6006, lo

5 10. THEREFORE the PARTS of SPEECH are Eight viz .

l . Substantive , 5 . Adverb

2 . A djective 6 . P rop osition;3. Pronoun 7. Conjunction4. Verb ; 8 . Interjectionwhich are Flexibilia, which are Infléxibilia, InFlexible

, or, declined. fl exible, or, undeclined.

FLExxo, Flexion, is the m anner of changing the endings of w ords

inorder to show their relations to other w ords . The flexionof

Nouns is called Déclinat‘i ii , Declens i on the flexion of VerbsC6nji

’

1g5t‘

ifi, Conjugation.

4 ACCIDENCE ,

DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES.

5 II. THE SUBSTANTIVE is declined by Number and Cafe.

NUMERI, the Numbers, are two

I. Singmas s, Singular, which speaks of one, as, Magister,a master.

II. Pluralis, Plura l, which speaks of more thanone. as.

Magistri , masters.

CA SUS, the Cases, are six

I. m inativ iis, the Nomina tive (or Subject) Case, usually goes before a Verb, and answers the questionWho, or What? as, Who teaches Magister docét,the master teaches.

II. Genitiv ii s, the Genitive Case, has the signof, and ou

swers the question,Whose, or Whereof as, Whosevoice Magistri vox, the vo ice of the master.

III. Dati vtis, the Dative Case, has the signs to, for, andanswers the question, To or for Whom ? T 0 or for

What ? as, To whom do I sp eak Loquor mag i s

trd, I sp eah to the master .

IV. A ccusativfis, the A ccusa tive (or Object) Case, follow sthe Verb, and answ ers the question, Whom or

What ? as, Whom do I see Vi dec'

) magi strum ,

I see the master. It also follow s Prepositions.

V. Vocativiis, the Vocative Case, is of one called or spokento : as, O magister i 0 master

VI. A blati vii s, the Ablative Case, has the signs by, w ith

from ,in

, and others, and oftenfollow s Prepositions

as, Bg whom am I taught? Docéér a magistrfi,

I am taught by the master.

OR WORD-FORMATION. 5

12 . There are .Five DECLENSIONS of LatinSubstantives,knownby the endings of the Genitive Case Singular.

The Genitive Singular of the 1st Declensionends in(8 .

2ud

3rd

4th

5th

I3. GENERA, the Genders, ofNouns are three

I. Masculinum ,filasculine.

II. Femininum ,Feminine.

III. Nefitrum ,Neuter.

Note. Whena Noun can be either Masculine or Fem inine, itsGender is called Cdmmfine, Common as , paréns, a p a rent.

FIRST DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES

14. The Nom inative of the First Declension ends ina

except a few Greek words, chiefly Proper Names,

which end inas,es

, or e.

Nom . Méns-a, a table M éns-é , tables

G en. Méns- zie, of a table M éns-firum , of tablesDat. Mensi é

'

e, to orfor a table Mens-i s, to orfor tablesA cc. Mens-am , a table Méns-as, tables

M éns-a, 0 table bléns-ée, 0 tables

Abl. M éns-a, by, with, orfrom a M éns-i s, by, w ith, orfrom tables .

Obs. 1. Som e Nouns take um as w ell as a rum inthe Genitive Plural “

as, cdeli colum or

Obs. 2 . Bed, a goddess , has Dative and Ablative Plural dééibii s. So

fi li ii , a daughter, fi li ébii s.

Note. G reek Nouns inas , es , s, are thus declined

Nom . i En‘

é-as, G en. 5c, Dat. a'

e, Acc . {inor am , Voc. ii Abl. 5.

Nom . Anchi s-é’s, Gen. 5c, Dat. é'

e, A ce. 511 Voc. 6 or a, Abl. 5 or 5

Nom . cybel-é , G en. és,Dat. 59 , Acc. én Voc. é Abl. é

ACCIDENCE,

SECOND DECLENSION.

15. T heNominative oi the Second Declension ends inor®of the Masculine gender : inum of the Neu

Nom .

G en.

Dat.A cc.

Voc.

Abl.

Nom .

Gen.

Dat.A cc.

Voc.

Ab] .

gender.

(a ) Masculine Substantives.

Dhm ln-iis, a lordDhm

‘

in-i , of a lord

DhmIn-d, to orfor a lord

Dhm‘

in-um , a lord

DBmIn-é, 0 lordD6m

‘

in-6 , by, with, orfrom a lord.

Magi st-ér, a masterMagi str-i , of a master

Magi str-o'

, to orfor a master

Magi str-um , a master

Magi st-er, 0 ma sterMagi stp d, by, with, or from a

master

Pfi-er, a boyPhér-

‘

i , of a boyFiler-6, to orfor a boyP iiéro um ,

a boyPfi-ér, 0 boyFiler-6, by, with, orfrom a boy.

Dhm‘

in-i , lordsDhm

‘

in-drum , of lordsDhm

‘

in-i s, to orfor lordsDhm

‘

in-ds, lordsDhm

‘

in-i , 0 lords

Dhm in-i s, by, w ith. orfrom lords.

Magi str-i , mastersMagi str-Eirum , of mastersMagi str-i s , to orfor masters

M5gi str-6s, ma stersMagi str-i , O mastersMagi str-i s, by, with, or from

Pfiér-‘

i , boys

Filer-drum , of boysPh

‘

e’

r-i s, to orfor boysPher-ds, boysPher-i , 0 boysFli er-i s, by, with, orfrom boys.

(6) Neuter.

Sing .

Bégu-um , a kingdomR égn-i , of a kingdomR égn-G, to orfor a kingdomBégu-um , a kingdomR égn-um , O kingdomRégn-G, by, with, or from a

kingdom.

R'

e'gn-a, kingdoni s

R é’

gn-b'

rum , of kingdomsBégu-i s, to orfor kingdomsR égn-a, kingdomsBégu-a, 0 kingdomsBégu-i s, by, with, or from lung

OR WORD-FORMAT ION. 7

l Most Substantives iner are declined like magi ster, dropp ing einthe Genitive . Tho se declined like pher, keep ing e, are :

sheer, g ‘

ener, armi ger,adfilte

’

r, Vesper, si gni fer.2. Liber, a book, is declined like magi stér. fiber, Bacchus, and

i beri ,’children, like p li er.

3. Fil‘

i t’

i s, and Roman Proper Nam es in i lls, m ake the

Vocative in i : as , fi l'

i , 0 son gén'

l , 0 genius , Mércfiri , O

J lercurius ; C51, 0 Ca ins : Pém pé i , O Pomp eias.

l. G enitives in i i w ere anciently contracted into'

z ; as ingen‘ium ,

disp osition, inge’

n‘

ii , ingeni .

5. Som e Nouns take am as w ell as orum in the Genitive Plural :

as, nfimmum or nfimm drum.

Note 1. Dé’

i’

i s , God , is thus declined :

Sing.

DSIIS,"God

Dei,of God

Déd, to God

Deum , God

Dé i’

i s , O God

D66, by, w ith, orfrom

Note 2 . Vi r, a man, G en. v‘

lr‘

i . &c . Plur. Nom . vlr’l, 310.

Note 8 . Greek w ords in58 , kin, are thus declined

Sing .

Nom . DelbsG en. DeliDat. DéldA cc. Delbu or DélumVoc . DéleAbl. D616 .

THIRD DECLENSION.

5 16. The Nom inative of the Third Declensionends ina, e,

0 , c, l, n, r , s , t, m: the Genitive always ends inis ,but is formed from the Nom inative inmany different

Plur.

Di ( seldom Dei or Di i ) , GodsDédrum or De'fun, of Gods

l) i s ( seldom Dei s or i i s) , to GodsB558, Gods

Di ( seldom Déi or D 11) , 0 Gods

Di s ( seldom De’is or i i s) , by

w ith, orfrom Gods .

8 ACCIDENCE ,

Formationof the Genitive inThird Declension.

Nom . Term ination.

A

E

0

no , GO

T EK

L'

s (parisy l. )as ( impari

syl. )

v

G en. adds tis as, po ema, pbémati s .

V V

G en. is : as mare, mans

Gen. adds nis as, led, 1

But card, cai rni s .

Gen. inis as , 6rd6. 6rdini s ; vi rgo' , vi rgini s.So hbm b, ném d, tfirbb, Apo

'

llb. But ligd,ligc

'

irii s ; Macedd, Macedbni s.

e’

dn‘

i s nati d,ni t‘

i dn‘

i s .

Lac, lacti s.Gen. adds ls as, $61, sdli s. But me] , méllis ;f351, félli s ; sali s .

Gen. adds is : as , T i tan, T i tani s ; rén. rénis.

But sindbn, sindbni s ; so G6rg6n halcydnw ith others. Some Proper Nam es make

ontis , as, Xénbphdn, xenbphbnti s.Gen. inis as , lfimen, liim

‘

in‘

i s : so

Gen. (i ris : as,czi lchr, c zi lczi ri s ; o r dris , as ,

ji’

lbar, jl’

i bz‘

iri s ; par, pari s. But fai r, fdrr‘

i s.

Gen. adds is as , career, careeri s ; ver,

véri s.

Gen. casts out e and adds is : as , pate’

r, patris .‘

( So also imber, imbris ; and nam es of

m onth s iner, as , Nbvém ber, Nbvémbris . )

But J iippi ter, J bv‘

i s ; i ter, i tineris ; later,late

’

ri s.

G en. (i ris : as, hbnbr, hbndr‘

i s ; but ai rbbr,ai rbbri s ; é

'

equbr, eiequbr‘

i s ; m éirmbr, mar

m bri s cbr, cdrd‘

is.

Gen. adds is : as , ffilgt’

i r, ffilgfir‘

i s i hr, ffiri s.

Gen. b'

ris as, ebur, ebbr‘

i s. But jec i’

i r,

jéc‘

inbr‘

i s and jecbri s.

Gen. dtis as , detii s, sietiiti s. But vés, vai si s ;vfis, vad

‘

i s ; mas, m‘

ari s as, ei ssi s.

Gen. cint‘

is as , Pai llzi s, Pallant‘

i s ; so gi gci s ;

elephas ; adam i s .

Gen. dd is : as , Pallas, Palladi s.

G en. is : as , nfibes , m'

i hi s.

Gen. itis as , mi les, m i li ti s : so hGSpes ; sa

téllé’

s ; merg ‘es.Gen. e

’

tis : as. seges, segeti s : so intérprés,téges .

G en. élis as, qui és , qui éti s.

idis as bbses , 6bsi di s .

e’

dis : only pes , pedi s, w ith its com

pounds.e'

dis only m é rces , héré’

s.

But Cérés, Ceteri s ; ties. aeri s N pries, pré di s.

F. M.

M . N.

M . N.

M. F.

OR WORD-FORMATION. 9

Gen. is . as, iivis . avi s , amni s, amni s.G en. idis . as, lap

‘

i s, li pi di s : so cass‘

i s (helmet) . tigris (also parisyll.

eri’

s . as cm i s, cinéris pulv1s, pul

ver1s.

itis t—li s , i ti s : so Si mni s, Qui ri s, Di s.

But sangui s, séinguini s ; gli s , gli ri s.

Gen. one as, dds, dbti s : so eds ; sacérdbs.

(i ris as, fl'

cis. fldri s ; é'

s, (i ri s.

But cfistds , cfistbdi s ; bds, bbv‘

i s ; bs, bssi s.

G en. iltis : as, vi rtfi s , vi rtfit‘

i s : so sérvitfis ;

ji’

i véntii s ; senectiis ; salii s.

i di s : as, palfis, paladi s : so incii s. But

péc i‘

xs, pecfid‘

is.

i ris as, téllii s, tellfir‘

i s ; and monosyl

lables ; as rh s,’mfis. N. M . F.

But grus, grui s ,sii s, sui s.

Gen. eris as, vii lnus , vulner1s Vénus, Véueris.

b’

ris . as , pecus, pecori s .

Gen. audis : only laii s , land i s ;Gen. tis for s : as , puls, pulti s ,

fr6ns, fron

ti s ; part1s. But frons, frondi s ;glans, glandi s. F. M.

38 , P8 , ms Gen. in before 3 : as , trabs, trab‘

i s ;

sti rp s, hi ém s, h i em‘

i s.‘

But cab

F. M.

Gen. m i'

m i céps, m iini ci pi s. So

princéps, aficéps.

Gen itis : cap l‘

i t, capi ti s, and its compounds .

Gen. acts as, pa'

ix, pri ci s. But fax, faci s.

Gen. iei e : as, jiidéx, ji

'

i di ci s : so vindéxindex i lex ; cérex. But vi béx, vi bi ci s ;vérvéx, vérvéci s ; néx, nec

‘

is.

Egis as,léx, legi s. But gréx,

rém éx, rémi gi s.

R em ark senéx, sén‘

i s si’

lpélléx, sfipéllécti li s.

Gen. teis as, c6rni x, cbrni ci s : so pho’

eni x.

ieie as, cali x, so f6 rni x. But

stri x, stri gi s ; ni x, ni vi s.Gen. bais as, v6x, v6c

‘

i s. Butn6x, n6ct‘

is. F.

Gen. ilois : as, nfix, nt’

i c‘

i s . But lfix, lficis ;Pdllfix, Pbllfici s ; c6nii

’

1x, c6nji'

1g is. F. bl.

Gen. yg is . as, Phryx, Phrygi s. Some have

ycis , y'

cis. F. M.

NI , Rx Gen. cis or g is : as , lynx, lynci s , zi rx, arci s ,

Sphinx, Sphingi s. F.

Obs. Pariayllab le i s a Nounhav ing as m any syllables inthe Gen. Sing.

as inthe Nom . lmparisyllable a Noun having more syllablesinthe Gen. Sing. than1nthe Nom .

10 ACCIDENCE,

EXAMPLES IN THE THIRD DECLENSION.

A . Masculine and Feminine Substantives.

(a ) Parisyllables ; ornot increasing inthe Genitive Singular.

Sing.

Nom . Nab-és, a cloud Ni'

lb-é'

s, clouds

G en. Nfib-‘

i s, of a cloud Nuh-i um , of cloudsDat. Nab-i , to orfor a cloud Nfib-‘i b ii s, to orfor cloudsA cc. NLi b-em ,

a cloud Nfib-és, cloudsVoc. Nab-Es, 0 cloud Niib-és, 0 cloudsA bl. Nfib-

‘

é, by, with, orfrom a cloud. Niib-ib i’

l s, by, with, orfrom clouds.

Nom . C i v-Is, a citiz en Ci v-é'

s, citiz ensG en. Ci v-i s, of a citiz en C i v-i u1n, of citiz ensDat. Ci v-i , to orfor a citiz en Ci v-i bfis , to orfor citiz ensA cc . Ci v-em , a citiz en Ci v-és , citi z ensVoc . Ci v-i s, 0 citiz en C i v-és , 0 citiz ensA bl. Ci v-é , by,with, orfrom a citiz en. C iv-i bii s, by , with, orfrom citiz ens.

(b) Imparisyllables or increasing inthe Genitive Singular.

Nom . L655, a lion Leom és, lions

G en. Leon-Is , of a li Leon-um , of lionsDat. Leon-i , to orfor a lion Leon-i b i s, to orfor lionsA cc. Leon-em , a lion Leon-és, lionsVoc. Leo, 0 lion Leon-és, O lionsAbl. Leon-é, by, with, orfrom a lion. Leon-i bus, by, with, orfrom lions .

Nom . Vi rgo, a virgin Vi rgin-“

és, virginsG en. i rg‘in-i s, of a virgin Vi rgin

-um, of virgins

Dat. i rg‘in-i , to orfor a virgin i rgin to orfor virginsA cc .

Vi rgin-em , a virgin i rgi 11-és, virg insVoc. Vixgo, 0 virg in Vi rgin-és

,0 virg ins

Abl. Vi rgin-é, by, with, or from a Vi rgin-i bfis, by, with, or fromvirgin. virg ins .

12 acomnnos .

(b) Plural a .

SingOp ii s, a work Oper-a, works

Gen. Oper-‘

i s, of a work Oper-um , of worksDat. Opér-i , to orfor a work Oper

-i bus , to orfor root-let

A ce. Op-i‘

i s, a work Oper-a, works

Voc . Op-fi s, 0 work ops -5, 0 works

A bl. Opér-é, by, with, orfi-om a work. Oper-‘

ibfis, by.with, orfrom works .

Nom . Ffilmén, lightning Ffi lmin-a, lightningsG en. Ffilmin-i s , of lightning Ffilmin-um , of lightningsDat. Fulmin-i , to orfor lightning Fulmin-i bli s

,to orfor lightnings

A cc . Ffilmen, lightning Ffilmin-a, lightningsFfilmén, 0 lightning Ffilm

‘

in-a, 0 lightningsAbl. Ffilmin-é, by, with, orfrom light Fulmin-‘i b ii s, by, with, or from

ning. lightnings.

FOURTH DECLENSION.

19 . The Nom inative of Masculine and Fem inine Substantives of thé Fourth Declension ends in us ; that of

Neuter Substantives inu.

Nom . Grad-halo step Grad-as, step s

G en. Grad-us, of a step Grad-hum , of step s

Dat. G rad-ii i , to orfor a step Grad-i bfis, to orfor step :

Acc. G rad-um , a stepIGrad-(i s , step s

Voc . G rad-us, 0 stepIG rad 0 step s

Abl. Grad-G, by, w ith, orfrom a step . Grad-i bi’i s, by, with, orfrom step s

Nom . Gen-fl , a knee Gen-ii i , kneesGen. Gen-us, of a knee Gen-hum ,

of kneesDat. Gen- ii , to orfor a knee Gen-i bi s, to orfor knemAcc. Gen-ii , a knee Gen-ii i , kneesVo c. Gen-i i , 0 knee G ian-ha, O knees

Abl. Gén-fi , by, with, orfi rm a knee. Gén by. with, orfrom knees.

onWORD-FORMATION. 13

Obs . l . The follow ing w ords take itbtts instead of ibiis inthe Dativc andA blative Plura l

Arc ii s, tri bii s, zi rtfis, Quércii s, ficfis,Spe

’c ‘us, p6rt1‘

i s, pai rtii s, Vérfi , lficii s.

Obs . 2 . Dbm iis is peculiarly declined. See N01 123.

FIFTH DECLENSION.

20. The Nom inative ends ines.

Sing.

Nom. Faci -es, a face FZwi -és’

,facesG en. Faci -éi , of a face Faci -erum , offacesDat. Faci -éi , to orfor a face. Faci - ébi

'

i s , to orforfacesAcc. Faci -em , a fi zce Faci -és,fa cesVoc . Fac‘i -és, 0 face Faci -és, 0 fa cesAbl. Féci -e

'

, by, with, orfrom a face Fac i -ébi’

i s, by, w ith, orfrom faces .

ON SOME CASES OF THE THIRD DECLENSION

21. 23.

Im pro em A ccusativo, Ium pr6 um qué éfl'

e'

rfintI pro e inA blativo Plurali Genitivo santDant buris, ciiciimis, c

‘

imu'

ss is

R dvis , sitis, vis, ét tuss is

Et flfim inaqua clafidit is,Ut A lbis, L iris, T ibe

'

ris. e e

[m vél em A ccusativf) ,I veil e inA blativf) [clav isDani; nép tis, febris, messes

,

Pupp is, p élvis , réstis, navis,l

é'

curis, tilrris addehi s

Séméntis atquestrigilis.

22 .

ISingfilari s Ablativi , Hi s éxcip‘

i éndasantIll Plurali s Nom inativi 53 um libéntér éfi

'

é rfint),Neutragafidént fingere

’

, nis.Qua: éXéi

'

m t ina i,“7

3e. Et accip ite

'

r, ét cc

‘

inis,

HTS éXCépi/é. siint inQT, Frdtéra mate

'

r , jdvé'

nig,Bdcciir, nécta

'

r, jiibiir,far. Et sa'

epitis lip is, vo’

liicris

(1) Iformant‘

ia Ablati vo

(2) N6ncrescentiaGenitivo(3) Pléraque m a: v6] 8

Post c6nsonantem pos1tia

(4) Cum al‘

i i s Monésyllabi sMas, mus

,nix

, now,cos

,

Sal, sol, co'

r, p aw, g lis

lis, et dos.

14 ACCLDENCE ,

DECLENSION OF ADJ ECTIVES.

A. A djectives of THREE TERMINATIONS inus, a , um,

or er, a , um, are declined inthe Masculine anc‘.Neuter Genders like Substantives of the SecondDeclension, and in the Fem inine Gender likeSubstantives of the FirstDeclension as, bdnfis,good ; nigér, black ; ténér, tender.

M . F. N. M . F. N.

BE’

m-fis bhu-‘

a h i m-um BE’

m-i a -é'

e h i m-a

G . Bi’

m-i bbn-eia h i m-i a -drum bbn-arum h i m-drum

D . B6n-6 b‘

on-é bbno B611-i s b bn-i s ban-i sA . BBn-um h i m-am bbn-um BBn-és bhu-és bbn-aV. BBn-é h i m-a hbn-um Eon-i bbn-éa bbn-a '

A . a -6 bbn-ti . bbn-B Bén-i s bbn-i s a -i s

Ni g-ér nigr-ENigr-i nigr-zie

Nigr-o nigr-a'

e

Nigr-um nigr-am

Nig~er nigr-aNigr-6 nigr- zi

Tenet té’

nér-a

Téné’

r-i ténér-a’

e

Teller-6 ténér-é

Téné’

r-um ténér- am

Ténér tenet-a

Té’

nér-d tene’

r-a

Obs. The Adjectives declined like tener are, asp‘

e’

r, lac ‘e’r, li ber, m i ser.prdspé

’

r, and the compounds of fé rci and gerd, as afi ri fér.

hell‘

igér. Déxtér is declined both w ays.

25. B . A djectives With TWO TERMINATIONS or ONE TER

MINATION follow the Third Declensionof Sub

stantives as, tri sti s, sad félix, happy ingéns,huge méliér, better .

N. Tri st-‘

i s tri st-é Fél-ixG . Tri st-is Feli c-i sD. Feli c -iA . Tri st-em tri st-e Féli c-em fél-i x Ingént-emV. Tri st-i s tri st-é Fél-i x IngénsA. Tri stni Ingént-i or 6

Nigr-i nigr-a! nigr-aNigr-6mm nigr-arum nigr-6rumN1gr-i s nigr-i s nigr-

‘

i s

Nigr-6 5 nigr-as nigr-a'

Nigri nigr-se nigr-aNigr i s nigr-i s ni

,Dvr-i s

Tener-i tenet-é tené'

r-a

Ténér-6rum ténér-arum tener-6rum

Ténér-i s tén‘

e’

r-i s ténér-i s

Tenet-6s tenet-as tener-a

Tenet-i tenet -{e tener-a

Ténér-i s tenet-i s tene’

r-i s

OR WORD-FORMA TION. 15

N. Tri sto és tri st-‘

ia Feli c' es Reli c lngént-és i 11gént-i§

G . Tri st-ium Feli c-ium Ingent-i umD. Tri st-

‘

ibfis Féli c-‘

ibtis Ingént-‘

ibi’

i s

Tri st-és tri st-‘

i i Feli c-és feli c-‘ia Ingent-és ingent-‘i iV. Tri st-és tri st-

‘

i a Fél’

i c-és Eli e-i i lngént-és ingent-i iA Tri st-

‘

ibl‘

i s Féli c-ihfis Ingent-‘i bi’i s

Singular.

M . F. N. M . F. N.

Mél‘

i-ér meli -t‘

i s Meli 6t-és m él‘

i 6r-5

Mel‘

i6r-‘

i s M él‘

i 6r-um

Me i 6r-i Meli 6r-‘

ib 1‘

i s

Meli 6r-em mel‘

i -fis Méli 6r-és m é’

l‘

i6r-5

Mél‘

i m él‘

i -tis Mél‘

i 6r-és m él‘

i 6r-5

Méli 6r-é or i M‘

e’

i 6r-‘

ihi’

18

Obs Adjectives iner, follow ing the Th ird Declension of Substantives,have Three Term inations in the Nom . Sing. : as, acér, {tor-Is.

ti er-e, sharp célér, célér-i s, célér-é, swift.

MNom . A cér

u cn. Acr-is

Dat. A cr-i

A cc . Aer-em

A cerAbl. Acr-i

The Plural term inations

live Plural of celer.

The follow ing are

fin-um Ut-er

iin-um Utr-um

fin-6 Utr-6

Ali iis, another. A lter, one of two.

Nom. Ali -fis 511-5 511m Alter alter-5. filtér-um

Gen. Al-i tis A lter-hi s

Dat. A l‘

i -i Alter-i

A ce. A li -um ali -am i l‘

i -fid Altér-um alter-am filté-rum

Abl. A li -6 511-6. 51-15 A lter-6 alter-6 alter-6

Like hui’

1s are declined fillfis, any nfilll‘

i s, none s6lii s, alone ;-t6ti

’

15, whole. L ike ti ter : neuter, neither , fitérqué, each ii tér

vi s, ut'

érli bét, which you will.

M . F.

Célér céler-‘

i s celer éCélér-i s cele’r-‘i s cele’r-‘i sCélér-i céler-i céle

’

r-i

C‘

e’le

’

r-em célér-em celer-éCélér celer-‘i s céler-é

Ce’

ler-i celér-i célér-i

are like those oftri sti s ; except celerum . Geni

1rregularly declined inthe Singular

Uter, which of two.

F. N.

utr-a utr-um

Utr- i ii s

Utr-i

utr-am

utr-a

16 ‘ ACCIDENCE,

COMPARISON.

27. THE ADJ ECTIVE is compared by three Degrees the

Positive, the Comparative, and the Superlative : as,

Pos. Comp . Sup .

Dfirfis, hard ; d1'

11‘

1or, harder ; dfirl ssim iis, ha rdest ;

The Comparative is formed from the Positive bychanging i or is of the Genitive into ior.

The Superlative is formed from the Positive bychanging i or is of the Genitive into issimus as,

Pos . Comp . Sup .

Durfis, ha rd, Gen. dfir-i dfir-ibr diir-i ssimtis

Brevis, short, brev -i s brév -idr brev-i ssimfis

Audax, bold, audac-is afidac-ior afidzi c-i ss‘

imiis

EXCEPT I0NS.

A djectives iner form the Superlative by adding -r imus

to the Nom inative : as, pulcher, beautiful, Comp .

pfilchr-ibr

, Sup . pfilchér-rimus ; célér, swift, cele

r‘

1'

or, celérrimus . So vétii s, anc ient, (Gen. vétéris,)Sup . vétérrimfis.

(2) The follow ing form the Superlative inillimiisfacilis, difi

'

icilis,

similis, dissimilis,

gracilis, et humilis.

(3) A djectives indicfis, fic ii s, vdlti s, form their Comparatives and Superlatives as if from Positives in

dieéns, ficens, v iiléns : as,

mfilédicfis, slanderous, mal‘

e’

dicéntibr, malédicénti ssimhs,bénéfi ctis, beneficent, bénéfi céntior, benéfi cénti ssimfi s,

V V V

bénévbliis, benevolent, benevoléntibr, bénévblénti ssimtis.

(4) If the Positive has a vowel before us, the Comparative .

and Superlative are formed by prefixing the A d

verbs magi s, more, maximé, most, to the Positive

as, ardii -fis, steep magis ardtius, more steepmaxime ardti ii s

,most steep . But those inguus are

compared as usual : as, antiquus, ancient, antiqu‘

ibr,

antiquiss‘

imfis. So strentifis, vigorous, forms Sup.

strénuiss‘

imfis ; pitis, p ious, pii ss‘

imtis.

onWORD-FORMATION. 17

IRREGULAR COMPARISON.

P0 8. Comp .

Bénfis, goodW

6pt‘

im fis

Malfis, bad péssim t’

xs

Magu(is , great maximhs

Pfirv‘

us, sma ll m inér m inim ii s

Mfilms , much"

pliis plfir‘

im i’

zs

Néqnam , w icked uéqu‘

i iir néqui ssim ii s

Di ves , rich di vi t‘

ibr or di t‘

i br i v'

i ti ss'

nnii s or di t‘

l séi m ij"

Senex, old séni é r (nan—1 maxim ii s )

J i’

xvéni s , young juni or (natfi m i u'

lm fis )Extéri

’

xs, outward exter‘

i br éxtrém ii s and éxtim i’

xs

Inférfis, low infé’

r‘

i ér infi m i’

i s and im i’

i s

Shpérii s, high sfipér‘

i ér suprém i’

i s and sfimm i’

xs

Po'

stérl‘

i s, h indwa rd pbster‘

i ér pé strém i’

xs and pé sti’

nnus.

Comparatives and Superlatives formed from Prepositions.

Pos . Comp . Sup .

(Citrfi, this s ide of ) ci téri br c‘

i t‘m fis

( Intra, w ith in)‘

m tér‘

nbr intlmfis

(Ultra, beyond) fi ltéri ér fi ltimfis

( Przia, before ) p r‘

iér prim ii s

( Prbpé, near ) p rbpi i’

n‘ pe im i’

i s .

Comparatives and Superlatives formed Without a Positive .

Comp. Sup . Comp . Sup .

Détér‘

i ér, worse détérrim i’

i s Oc‘

i br, swifter fici ssimfis

Pati br, more des irable pbt’

i ss‘

imfis

Obs. Many Adjectives are not com pared at all ; others have noComparative ; som e no Superlative .

30. ADVERBS derived from A djectives are compared inus and e as,

(Digniis, w orthy,) digne, worth ily , dignifis, digni ss‘

imé.

G ravis, w eighty) grav iter, uieightily, gravifis, gravissimé.

[nthe same m anner,Saapé, often, saé p i us, sé pi ssimé.

D i ll , long , diutius, difiti ss‘

imé .

Pénitfis,deep ly, pén

‘

ititis, pén‘

i ti ss‘

im é.

Mag i s, more,maximé ; détéri

’

ii s, worse, détérr’

imé ;

pbt‘

i l‘

i s, ra ther, potiss‘

imum ; more quickly, (Scis

sime ; pri l‘

i s, sooner, primum ; have no Positive .

Belle, p rettily, bell’

issime ; merito, desert edly, m ériti s

sime nupér, lately, nfipérrimé ; have no Comparative.

Sati s, enough, sati z‘

i s ; 850 1“

s, difl'

erently, seems ; have

no Sunerlative .

A CCIDENCE18

am

wmufims

r

83

5

amB

EWE

E

ammom

swvmmv

ammo

?a

w

38mm

ammo

?

dwwom>wwc

m

awro

gmwmfiv

emwomemm

ima

sme

gma

ammowvcmzw

aw

owfiu

mwa

msv

$625

:

umw

fimvmc

v

$6

35

6

30

3

awry

nc

amCo

m

dwmnma

dwwzvcmsv

gna

w-

5awe

d

B

Aw

Eww

Emwmh

vmsv

Ewo

cs

mec

m

Emo

gweomu

flmwcwm

mama

?

Ewe

?

nswu

ncm

53mm

mama

m:

C

?

Em

fisv

sN

EW“

E

nmfimnmmMufimzv

m

mmwmm

b

mwmwww

twtz

m

a

msammcu

mema

e

mwa

mo

?u

mmp

5.

mmc

fimmo

ncm

mwmwo

nmwv

mmEmomv

mwsw

amm

m

mowv

a

wa

xww

m

mo

wv

mmu

cwzm

m

momwmfi

fimzv

m

mo

wv

m

momwmmv

m

momv

m

m

momv

a

ficm

mmima

o

w

$85

ma

ma

ama

maa

cwsv

mmfims

c

S

EQ

wwvc

mumm

mmEm

a

map—m

wmh

vmsv

55mm

:

wa

Ew

Emec

m

ws

Em

Ememmw

ch

m?

w

w

mc

m

S

EM?

s

fiwsmvcm

ccmwsmewme

Eowfi

Ew

EWm

Emuwvmm

Emowfi

fsr

Es

meg

mmzmsc

Emowvmb

Emomwmmv

Em

omfic

m

Eoowv

83m:

wa

o

m

aawm

www

wzvcmzc

$5

wwv

u

mca

dun

xxx

“

2M”

CN

N

XX

M

ax

a

ffix

~>M

>K

>X

>~

N

838 3(N O!0

H Q!

20 ACCIDENCE,

Diib, two, Tres, three, and Mi llia. thousands .

Plural.

DI. F. N.

N. Diié di’

i é'

e dub,Mi llia

G . Dudrum dl‘

iarum dudrum Mi lli umD. Dfibbfis dfiabi

’

i s dubbt’

i s M illib i’

is

A . Duds di’

i'

ti s dos Mi ll‘

ia

A . Di’

i ébfis dfiéb l‘

i s di’

ibbfis Tribl’

i s Mi llibfis

Note 1. Ambo , both, is declined like Dl’u‘i .Note 2 . The other Cardinal Numbers, from qufittfibr to céntum , are

undeclined. M1116 is also anundeclined Adjective.

DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS.

33. PRONOMINA , Pronouns, are

A . PERSONALIA , Personal Pronouns : ego, I ; tu, thou ;

sfii, himself, herself, or themselves.

B. POSSESSIVA , Possessive Pronouns, which are derived

from the Genitives of the Personal Pronouns : as ,

métis, my, mine ; tii iis, thy , thine ; sti lls,his, her, or

their own nbster, our ; Vester, your.

C. DEMONSTRATIVA, Demonstrative Pronouns : hi c, this ;1115,

‘

i ste, tha t ; and DETERMINATIVA : i s, that ; ipse’

,

self; idem ,the same.

D. RELATIVUM,the Relative Pronounqu

'

i . who or which

INTERROGATIVUM, the Interrogative, quis, qui , who

or what? and their compounds.

A . PERSONALIA .

1 . Pronounof l st Person.

Nam . Egh, I N65, weGen. Mei , of me Nastri and nb

'

strfim , of us

Dat. M i hi, to orfor me N6bi s, to orfor usA cc. Ms, me N63, usAbl. Me, by, with, orfrom me. Nbbi s, by, with, orfi om

2 . Pronounof 2d Person.

Sing.

Nom . T ii , thou V65, ye

Gen. Thi , of thee Vestri and véstrfim , of youDat. T i bi, to orfor thee Vabi s, to orfor youAcc. Te, thee V6s , you

Abl. Té , by, with, orfrom thee.l V6b

’

i s, by, w ith, orfrom you

OR WORD-FORMATION. 2 1

3. Pronounof 8d Person.

Nom . (w anting ),Gen. Sfii , of himself, herself, or themselvesDat. S

‘

i bi, to orfor himself, herself, or themselvesA cc. Se or himself, herself, or themselvesAbl. $6 or $656, by himself. herself, or themselves .

These Pronouns som etim es take tne syllable m et : as, ég6mét, Imyself v6smet, ye yourselves si bimet, to himself.

15. POSSESSIVA .

Me’

fis, med. meum ; ti’

n‘

i s , tha, tiium sti ii s , sat, siium ; like bhnfis, 24

Ndster, n6str5, u6strum vest‘

e’

r, vestra, vestrum ; like ni ger, 24 .

Obs . 1 . Mens, Voc. Masc . m i.Obs . 2 . G ENTILIA POSSESSIVA n6str-as, of our country véstr-fis

of your country cuj-as, -5t‘

i s, of what countryObs . 3. The Po sss ssxvnR ELATIVE, c i ljii s, cfija, c iijum , whose ?

g36 . C. DEMONSTRATIVA a DETERMlNA 1 lVA .

Sing. SingN. Hi c h zi

'

ec h6c Illé i llh i lliid Is 55

G . Hfijfis Illii’

i s Eju'

i s

I) . Hui c (111

A . Hfmc hanc h6c Illum i llam i lli’

id Eum eam i d

A . H60 1150 h6c 1116 i lla”

1116 E6 ea 66

Plur.

N H i has bé e Ill'

i i llé'

e i115 Ii eas 65

G . H6rum hfirum h6rum Ill6rum i llarum i ll6rum E6rum earum 66rud‘

H i s 11115“

i s or 618

A . H6s has h5ec 11163 11155 i lla E68 655 65

A . H i s Illi s 115 or e’

i s

Sing .

Nom . Idem eadem“

idem Ii dem ea'

edem eadem

G en. Ejii sdem E6ri1ndem é’

iiriindem 66rfindemDat. Ei dem Ii sdem or ei sdem

A cc . Efindem 65ndem”

i dem E6sdem easdem eadem

A bl. E6dem eadem 66dem i sdem or ei sdem

Obs. Iste is declined like 1116 ; i p se like 1115, butwith Neut. S. i psum

D . RELATIVUM.

Nom . Qui quz'

e qu6d Qui qué: qué

Gen. Cfiji’

i s Qu6rum quarum qu6rum

Dat. Cu'

i Qui bti s or quelsA cc . Quem quam qu6d Qu6s quiis

Abl Qu6 quz'

i qua Qu‘

i bi’

i s or quei s

A CCIDENCE,

The follow ing are mostly declined like Qui.Qu‘is, qu‘

id, and Qu'

i , qua'

e, qu6d ; G . c iij‘

ti s , & c. ; who or what?

( Interrogative.)Qu‘

i s, qua, qui d, any one. ( Indefinite ) Qu'

i is also used indefinitely.Qui dam , qua

'

edam , qu6ddam or qui ddam G . cfijfi sdam D. cui dam :

A cc. quéudam , quandam , qu6ddam ,&c . ; a certa inone.

Quiv‘

i s, qué vi s , qu6dvi s or qui dvi s G . cfijiiw i s ; any one.

Qui l‘

ihet. qua‘

el‘

i hét, qu6dli bét or qui dli bét ; G . cfijfisllbet ; any one

Qui cfinqué , qudacfinque, qu6dc i

'

1nque ; G . cfijfiscfinqué ; who or

whatsoever.

Qui snam , qui dnam , and quinam , qua'

enam , qu6dnam ; G . c iiji'

i snam ;

who or what

Qui squ‘

is , Neut. qui dqu‘

id ; Abl. qu6qu6 ; who o r whatsoever.

Qui sque. quaieque, qu6dque or qui dqué, each.

Qui squam qui dquam , any one. Plural w anting.Qui sp

‘

iam , quéep‘

iam , qui dp‘

i am , any one.

Al‘

iqu‘

i s, aliqua, iqu‘

i d, and ali quae, aliquhd, some one.

Ecqu‘

is, écqua, écqui d, and écqui , ecqué , écquéd, any one 7

Unfi squi sque, fini qua‘

eque, fint’

imquo'

dqué or iinfimqu'

tdque ; G.

unluscujusque ea ch one.

THE VERB.

VERBS have Two VOICES (Voces)(1) Vox A CTIVA , the A ctive (or Doing) Voice as ,

I love.

(2) V0}; PASSIVA, the Passive (or Suffering) Voiceas, ambr, I am loved.

Verbs of the A ctive Voice are either

(1) TRANSITIVA, acting onanobject: as, am6 Deum,

I love God : or,

(2) INTRANSITIVA , vel NEUTRA , expressing a state

as, sto, I stand .

Obs. Neuter Verbs Active have no Passive Voice, exceptas Impersonals inth e Th ird Persons Singular.

DEPONENTIA ,Deponent Verbs, though conjugated m

the Passive Voice ch iefly, lay aside (dep onunt) thePassive, and take an A ctive signification: some

being Transitive ; as, h6rt6r, I exhort ; some Neuter ;as, m6ri 6r, I die.

onWORD-FORMATION. 23

39 . Verbs have Three proper Moons (Modi)

(1) INDICATIVUS, Indicative,for unconditional

action: as, amo, I love.

2 ) Conannonvns. Conjunctive, for condi .

Modus v

ti onal acti on as, am em ,

I may love.

(3) IMP ERATIVUS, Imperative, for commandor entreaty : as, am ,

love thou.

The Conjunctive Mood in some of its uses is called Subjunctive, insome Potential.

Verbs have also

(1) INFINITIVUS, an Infinitive (improper) Mood, ex

pressing the action of the Verb without re

lations of Person as, amare’

,to love, amavisse,

to have loved .

GERUNDIA , G erunds ; Three innumber(a ) amandi , of loving ,(b) amando,for or by loving ,

(c ) amandum ,the loving

SUPINA , Supines ; Two innumber

(a ) amatum ,to love,

(b) ammo, to be loved ;

4) PARTICIPIA , Participles ; Tw o for each Voice as,

Present Part., z‘

imans, loving ,A ctlve Future Part., amatiirii s, aboutto love.

Past Part. , amatus loved,Passive c

Part. , m dus am andus, meet to be loved.

Note. I’artic ip les are so called, because they take pa rt or

the pro perties of Verbs, as T ense and TransitivePow er, and p art of the prop erties of Adjectives ,as Case and G ender. Thus they are the A d

jectives of the Verb , as the Infinitive (w ith the

Gerunds and Sup ines ) form s its Substantive .

40. Verbs have Six TENSES (Tempora) ; Three for unfi

nished action, Three for finished action

24 ACCIDENCE,

Unfinished Action.

(I) a snus , Present ; as , am6 , 1 love, or am loving .

2 ) PRE TER ITUM IM PERFECTUM , Preterimperfect : as , hmabam,I was loving.

(3) FUTURUM IM PERFECTUM , vel SIMPLEX , Future Imperfector Simple : as, amab6, I shall love, or shall be loving .

Finished Action.

( I) PRE TER ITUM PERFECTUM , Preterperfect: as , amavi , I loved,or have loved.

(2 ) PR E TER ITUM PLUSQUA M PERFECTUM , Preterpluperfect : as,

amaveram , I had loved.

( 3 ) FUTURUM PE RFECTUM vel ExACTUM . Future Perfect orExact: as, I sha ll have loved.

41. Verbs are conjugated also by Two NUMBERS, Singulaiand Plural and by Three PERSONS ineachNumber

Th e First expressing the Personor Persons w ho speak : as,

The Second expressing the Person or Persons to Whom one tuamas, thou lovest, v6s amati s, ye love.speaks : as,

The Th ird exp ressing that of

wh ich one speaks : as,

egb am6, I love.n6s amam ii s, we love,

“

1116 amat, he loves ,”

111i amant, they love

CONJUGATION OF VERBS.

g 42 . There are Four CONJ UGATIONS of LatinVerbs.

I. The First Conjugationis knownby a before ré’

as,

antaré , h6rtaré.

II. T he Second Conjugation is known by 5 before re

as, mouere, rerere.

III. The Third Conjugationis knownby 5 before ré’

: as,

regere, loquéré.

IV. The Fourth Conjugation is known by i before re

as, aiidiré, parti ré.

43. Inorder to conjugate a LatinVerb, it is necessary to

know ( l) The Present Indie. A ct. lst Person (2 )The Preterperfect Indie. A ct. lst Person; (3) T heInfinitive Pres. A ct. (4) The Supine inum. Forfrom these the other Tenses may be derived

onWORD-FORMA TION 25

544. It is useful for the learner, w hen conjugating a Verb,to mention also the 2d Person Sing . Pres. Indi e.

A ct., the Gerunds, Supines, and Participles. He w ill

therefore conjugate the Verbs as follow s :

l st Conj.

Pres. Ind. l st Pers.-5

2d Pers . {rm -as

Preterperfect am-avi

lnfinitive am are

Gerund indi am-andi

do am -and6

dum am-andum

Sup ine inum am-atum

a am-atfi

Partic iple Present aux-ansFuture am -atfiri

‘

i s

PASSIVE VOICE.

Pres Ind. l stPets. am 6n-ehr reg-hr afid—‘i br

2d Pers. em -ar‘

i s bn-eri s reg-eri s and-i ri s

Preterperfect 5m -atus sum 6n-‘

i tii s sum réct-iis sum afid-i tii s sum

Infinitive 5m -5r‘

i 6n-eri reg-i abd-

‘

i ri

Participle Perfect am-att’

i s réct-iis abd-‘

iti‘

is

indus Zim -e'

mdii s reg-endus aud—‘i éndl'is

EXAMPLES

Conj. like aux-6 .

ar-6 , I p loughcert-6 , I contendclam -6 , I cry out

car-6 , I rega rd

6pt-6 , I wi sh

pugu-6, Ifightn6m in~6, I name{edi fi c-6, I build.

Corgi. like reg-5.

teg-6 , I cover

sag-6, I suck

ji'

lng-6 , Ijoincing-6 , I girdi c-6 , I saydire-6, I lead

veh-6 , I ca rrycoqu

-6, I cook

i CTIVE VOICE.

2d Con] . 1 8d Conj.

mbn66 reg-6

m 6n-és regd s

mbu-i’

fi rex-i

m 6n—ere reg-ere

m bn-endi reg-end

'

i

m6n-end6 reg -end6.

m 6n-endum reg-endum

m bu-‘

i tum rect-ummbu-

‘

i tfi réct-ii

m 6n-ens reg-ens

m 6n-‘

itiiriis geet-firfis

CONIUGATION.

2d Conj. , like m 6n-e6 .

bah-66, I have

deb-66 , I owe

térr-é6 , Ifrightenp r6h

‘

i b-e6 , Iforbidéxérc-e6 , I exercisepraeb

-e6 , I af ordadhi b-e6 , I applyclimb-66 , I restra in.

Conj. like afid-‘

i6 .

f in I end

pan-I6 , I p unishmbu-

‘

i6 , [ fortifynbtt-

"i6 , I nourish

vest-16 , I clothecii st6d-

‘

i6 , I gua rdimp6d-16, I hinderand-16 , I instruct.

ACCIDENCE,

Indicative Mood .

S. Reg-6 , I rule,

reg-i s, thou rulest

reg-i t, he rules

Pl. reg-im ii s, we rule

re’

g-‘

i ti s , ye rule

reg-Tint, they rule

S. reg-ebam , I was

reg-ébas, thou wast

re’

g-ébét, he wa s

Pl. reg-ébam tis, we were

re’

g ye were

reg-ébant, they were

S. réx-i , I ruled

réx-‘

i sti , thou ruledst

rex-‘

it, he ruled

Pl. réx we ruled

rex-i st‘

is, ye ruled

réx-érfint, they ruled.

S. rex-eram , I had

rex thou hadst

réx-erat, he had

Pl. réx we had

réx-erati s, ye had

rex-e’

rant, they had

S. reg-am , I shall

reg-és , thou sha lt

reg-et, he sha ll

Pl. r‘

e’

g-ém

‘

us , we sha llre

’

g-é t

‘

i s, ye shall

reg-em, they shall

S. réx-er6 , I shall

rex-eris, thou shalt

rex-é’

ri t, he shall

Pl. réx we shall

réx-ériti s, ye shall

réx-erint, they shall

THE THIRD

Conjunctive Mood.

reg-am , I may

reg-as, thou maystreg

-at, he mayreg

-Em its, we mayré

’

g-at

‘

i s, ye mayreg

-ant, they may

reg I mightreg

-erés , thou mightstre

’

g-é

’

rét, he m ightré

’

g-érém i

’

rs, we mightré

’

g ye mightreg

-érént, they might

rex-e’

rim , I mayréx thou maystrex-er

‘

i t, he mayrex-érim iis

, we mayre

'

x-e’

riti s, ye mayréx-érint, they mayréx~i ssem, I would

rex-i ss'

és, thou wouldst

rex-i sse’

t, he would

réx-i ssém i’

i s, we would

rex-i ssét‘

i s, ye would

réx-i ssént, they would

rect-ii rii s s im , [ mayréct-firi

’

rs si s, thou maystréct-b rii s si t, he mayréct- firi si m ii s, we mayrect-fi ri si ti s, ye mayréct- ii ri sint, they may

ACTIVE

qb l8 ACCIDENCE,

THE FIRST

ACTIVE

Conjunctive Mood.

Am -6 , I love hm -em , I mayam -és, thou lovest

"i f am-és, thou mayst

am -ht, he loves

fim -z’

rm ii s, we love

Zim -at‘

i s , ye love

am -Eint, they love.

hm-ébam , I wa s

am thou wast

fim -iibfit, he wa s

am-Eibam ii s, we were

hm -abfiti s , ye were

am-abént, they were

fim-avi , I loved

am -avi sti , thou lovedst

am -avi t, he loved

Pl. fim we loved

fim -évi sti s, ye loved

am -avérfint,they loved.

ant-averam , I had

am-avéras, thou hadst

fim-averat. he had

Pl. am -averamns, we hadam -fiveré t

‘

i s, ye had

i m-averént, they had

S. am -ah6 , I shall

hm -ab‘

i s, thou shalt

hm -fib‘

i t, he shall

Pl. hm -abim ii s, we shall

am-fibi ti s, ye sha ll

hm -fibfint, they shall

S. 5m-5vér6, I sha ll

hm -fivéris, thou shalt

fim o fiver‘

i t, he sha ll

Pl. 5m -5vérim l’

1s, we sha ll

fim -avérit‘

i s , ye sha ll

i m -fiverlnt, they sha ll

fim -ét, he mayam -em i

’

i s , we may 3am-éti s , ye mayfim -ént, they may

am -firem , I mightilm-fires, thou mightstam -aret, he might5m -5rém iis, we m ightam -aréti s, ye mightam-arént, they m ight

am -averim , [ mayam -averis

,thou mayst

5m -5véri t, he mayam -avérim ii s , we mayi sm-averit

‘

i s , ye mayém -avérint, they may

am -fivi ssem , I would

am-avi ssés, thou wouldst

am-fivi sse'

t, he would

Eim -éivi ssém ii s, we would

am -avi ssét‘

i s, ye would

ém o avi ssént, they would

am -atii rus sim, I may

Elm -atiirii s si s, thou maystam-atfi ri

’

i s s‘

i t, he mayfim -Eitii ri sim ii s , we may5m -6tii ri si ti s, ye mayfim -étfiri slut, they may

C( )NJUGATION.

VO ICE .

em s , ém -at6 , love than

lim let him l ove

em e r'

ite, am-5t6té , love ye

hm-i nt6 , let them love.

OR WORD FOR MATION.

aux-are, to love, or

be loving .

5111-5118, M W

am-i v'

i ssé to have

hm-iitii rum éssém) 5m-5tfirfi8 ,

be about to love.

29

S.

Pl.

ACCIDENCE,

Am-6r, I am

5m -6r‘

is, thou art

hnb ati‘

i r, he is

hm -amur, we are

firn-fim‘

ini , ye a re

lam -antii r, they are

S. am -abfir, I was

ém -abari s, thou wast

am -filiétfir, he was

Pl. i nn-abém i’

i r, we were

i nt-abém ini , ye were

z‘

ixn-ébénti’

tr, they were

S. am -fiti’

i s sum , I wa s

Pl.

S.

Pl.

S.

Pl.

S.

Pl.

h ill-fitbs es , thou wast

aln-fitfis 6st, he wasam-ati slim Li s, we were

i m-éti estls, ye were

am -at'

i sfint, they were Jam -éti

‘

is eram , I had

ani -e'

ttli s eras, thou hadst

am -Ei tii s erat, he had

am -ati ere'

im ii s , we had

5m -5t’

i (i rati s, ye had

inn-5th é tant, they had

am -ébbr, I shall

am -dbér‘

i s , thou shalt

fim -abi tii r, he shall

5m-abimfir, we shall

im ye shall

am-ab iintii r, they sha ll

am -atti s er6 , I shall

ém -atii s er‘

i s , thou sha lt

am -att’

i s ér‘

it, he sha ll

5m -ati ér‘

i m ii s ,we sha ll

fim -ét‘

i er‘

iti s, ye sha ll

hm-iit'

i éri'

lntahey shall

loved

.

beenloved

.

ga.)

5

THE FIRST

PASSIVE

Conjunctive Mood.

am-ér, I may5m-6r

‘

i s, thou maysthm he mayém-ém fir, we may

fim -emin‘

i , ye may

fim -éntii r, they may

hm-arer, I mightam-firéri s, thou mightstam-aréti

’

i r, he mightam-arém fir, we m ightfim -arém

‘

i rfi , ye m ightism -are

fim -ati'

l s sim , [ mayam -Ziti

'

ls si s , thou maystam -atti s s

‘

i t, he mayam-ati sim ii s, we mayam -fiti si ti s , ye mayamensint, they may

been

am -étfis éssem , I would

am -fitfis éssé s, thou wouldst

am -att’

i s esse’

t, he wouldv v

um -ati e ssemus, we would

ém -fiti ésséti s, ye would

hm -ati éssént, they wouldhave

been

OR \YORD-FORMATION.

CONJUGATION.

Infinitive Mood.

am-fire, am -étbr, be thou

fim -ator, let h im be5m -§fi ,

to be loved.

let them be

am -Etum 6555, to

ha ve beenloved .

W ’

lim-Eitum"i d , to be

about to be loved.

be, meet 50

32

are

Imperfect.

Pl.

9

E

ACCIDENCE ,

Indicative Mood .

l\I6n-66 , [ adv ise

m 6n-és , thou advisest

m6n-ti t, he advises

m 6m-ém ii s, we advise

m 6n-eti s, ye advise

m 6n-6m, they advise.

m6n-61mm , I wa sv

m on-ebas, thou wastm 6n-éb6t, he wa sm 6n-éb5m ii s, we werem6n-éb5ti s, ye werem 6n-ébz

’

int, they were

m 6o advised

m 6n-ni sti , tnou advisedst

m 6n-ni t, he a dvised

m 6o - ii im ii s, we advised

m 6n tii sti s , ye advised

m6n- ii ér1'

1nt, they a dvised .

m 6n-66mm , I had

m 6n-6 6ras, thou hadstm 6n-berm, he had

tn6n-6er5m 1‘

i s, we had

m 6n-ii ér'

ati s, ye had

m6no iierei nt, they had

m 6neh6 , I shallm6n-ébi s , thou shalt

m 6n-ebi t, he sha ll

m 6n-ébim i’

15 , we sha ll

m 6n-éb‘

i ti s , ye shall

m 6n-ébfint, they sha ll

m 6n-66r6, I sha llm 6n-fiéris, thou shalt

m 6n-fremt, he shallm 6n- ii érimti s, we sha ll

m 6n-6 6riti s, ye shall

m6n-herint, they shall

advised

.

adv

ise.

THE SECOND

ACT1\'

E

Co zy’

unctive hlood.

m 6m-eam , I maym 6o -eds, thou maystm 6n-eat, he maym bn-éiim ii s , we maym 6n- 65th , ye maym bn-één

‘

t, they may

m 6n-erem , [ m ightm bxl-é té s , thou mightstm 6n-érét, he m ightm 6n-érém ii s , we m ightm 6n-eréti s. ye mightm 6n-érént, they m ight

m 6n-berim , [ maytli6n-fleris, thou maystm 6n-fiéri t, he maym 6n ii e

’

rim‘

us , we mr

m 6n ii ériti s , ye ma

m 6m uerint, they may

6 -6i ssem , I would

m 6n ii

6 - li set, he would

m 6n ii

m onnm on 11 1

i

i s

i

i .sseti s , ye would

ssent, t hey would

advise.

s s e s , thouwouldst

sem us, we would

have

m 6n-i tt'

1rii s sim , I maym 6n-i tii rii s si s, thou maystm 6n-i tfi rii s si t, he maym 6n-i tii ri si m ii s, we maym 6n-i tfi ri si ti s, ye maym6n-i tii ri sint, they may

OR WORD-FORMA TION. 33

CONJUGATION

Imperative Mood.

Q Q o 0 o

m6m-é, m6m-ét6 , advise thou

m6n let him advise

m6n-été, m on-ét6t6, advise yem6n-ént6, let them advise.

Supines.

Infinitive hIood. Particip les .

m 6m-ere, to advise,0 o I

V 0 0

Or be advi s ing.

non 9 115, advi s ing

m6m-fii ssé, to have

advised.

m6a -“6mm 6536,

to be about to ad

vise.

m6a-“T1 165, about

to advise.

m6n-h um , to advise

m 6n-“fl , to be advised.

ACCIDENCE,

THE SECOND

PASSIVE

Indicative Mood.

S. M6m-66r, I am

m 6m-ér‘

is, thou art

m 6m-ét6 r, he is

Pl. m 6n-61116 13 we a re

m 6n-6mm] , ye are

m 6m-é 11t6 r, they a re)

Cov iunctive Mood.

V v V

m on-earxs, thou mayestV v

m on-eatfir, he maym 6m-65mm; we maym 6m-651mm, ye maym 6m-65ntf1r, they may

5 S. m6m-éb6r,1 wa s m6m- éré

’

r I might$2 m 6m-ébi1r

'

1s , thou wa st m 611 -érér1s, thou m ightst2. m 6m-ébfit6 r, he wa s m 6m-éré t6 r, he mightE Pl. m 6m-611 11116 1 3 we were m 6n-ér

’

ém 6r, we mightm 6 11-éb5m

‘

i ye were 1116 11 ye mightm 6m-éb5nt6r, they wer m 6n-érént6r

,they m ight

S. m 6m sum , I was m 6n-116 3 sim , I may

g m 6n-R 6 3 és , thou wa st m 6x1 -i t6 s si s , thou mayst3 m 6m-R 6 15 ést, he wa s m61l-

‘

i ti’

1s si t, he may

5 Pl. m 6n-i ti sfim fis , we were m 6m-i t] sim us, we may

5 m 6n-i ti ést'

ls , ye were m 6n-i ti si t‘

i s, ye may

m 6m-h i si mt, they were

S. m 6n 6m m , I had

m 6x1-‘

1ti'

1 s 6151s , thou hadst

m 6m-“

i tfis éré t, he had

Pl. m 6n-h i Ere—1mm, we had

m 6n-i t? 6r5ti s, ye hadf1611 -

‘

1ti érant, they had

dvis

c

d.

been

S. m6n-effing I shall

m 611 -ébéri s, thou shalt

m 6m-61116 3 . he shali

Pl. m 6m-6611116 1 3 we shad

m 6m ye shall

m6m-ébfint6 r, they shall

S. m6n 6r6 , I shall

m 6n 6r‘

i s , thou shalt

m 6n ér‘

it, he sha ll

Pl. m 6m-i i i ér'

imfis ,we shalI

m 6m-Hi ém‘

i s , ye sha ll

m bu-Id érfint, theyshallhave

been

advised

.

m 6m-i ti sint, they may

111611 -1

m 6n-‘

itfis és sés ,thouwouldst

m 6n-“ni b éssé’t, he would

m6m essE’11168 ,we would

m 6n-Wt? éssfati s, ye would

advised

.

m 6m-1a éssént, they wouldhave

been

advised

.

ACCIDENCE,

Indicative Mood .

S. Reg-6 , I rule,

reg-i s, thou rulest

r‘

ég-i r, he rules

Pl. rég-‘

im fis, we rule

re’

g-i ti s , ye rule

reg-fmt, they rule

S. rég-ébam , I was

rég-ébei s, thou wast

rég-ébét, he wa s

Pl. rég-ébfim fis, we were

rég-ébét

‘

i s , ye were

rég-ébant, they were

S. réx-i , I ruled

réx-i sti , thou ruledst

réx-i t, he ruled

Pl. réx-im fis, we ruled

réx-i sti s, ye ruled

réx-érfint, they ruled.

S. réx-é’

ram , I had

réx-e’

ras, thou hadst

réx-érz‘

it, he had

Pl. réx-érzi m ti s, we had

réx-ériiti s, ye had

réx-é’

teint, they had

S. reg-am , I shall

rég-és , thou sha lt

ré’

g-ét, he sha ll

Pl. ré’

g-ém fis , we sha ll

rég-é t

‘

i s, ye shall

rég-ént, they shall

S. ré’

x-érF) , I shallréx-éris, thou sha lt

réx he sha ll

Pl. réx we shall

réx-ériti s, ye shall

réx-érint, they shall

THE THIRD

Conjunctive Mood.

r‘

e’

g-am , I may

reg-(i s, thou maystrég

-ét, he mayrég

-zi mfis , we mayrég

- zi t‘

i s, ye mayreg

-sint, they may

rég-e

’

rem , I m ightrég

-étés , thou mightstrég-é

’

rét, he m ightrég

-érém i’

l s, we mightrég

- éréti s , ye mightre

’

g-érém , they might

réx-e’

rim , I mayréx-éris, thou maystréx-e

’

ti t, he mayréx-é

’

rim fis, we may

ré'

x-é’

riti s, ye mayréx-e

’

fi a t, they may

réx-i ssem , I would

réx-i ssés, thou wouldst

réx-i sse’

t, he would

rex-i ssém i’

l s, we would

réx-i sséti s, ye would

réx-i ssé'

nt, they would

réct-firfis sim , I mayréct-firfis si s, thou maystréct-firfis si t, he mayréct- fir

‘

i si m ii s, we mayréct-fi ri si ti s, ye mayréct-i ri sint, they may

ACTIVE

ruled.

OR WORD-FORMATION. R7

CONJUGATION.

VOICE .

Imp erative blood.

reg-6, reg-R6 , rule thou

rég-‘

i tfi, let him rule

reg-‘

ite, regi tfité'

, rule ye

reg let them rule

Sup ines .

Infinitiv

rég-éré, to rule, or

reg-ens, ruling.

réx-i ssé, to have

ruled.

réct-am m 5355, to réct-firfis, about to

be about to rule.

réct-um , to rule.

réct-fi , to be ruled .

38 ACCIDENCE,

THE THIRD

Conjunctive blood.

a; S. R6g-6r, I am rég

u zir, [ may

g rég-ér

‘

i s,thou art reg

- zi ti s, thou maystE rég-i tiir, he is rég

-fitfir, he may

g Pl. ré’

g-im i

’

xr, we are re’

g-ei m ii r, we may

i? rég-‘

imini , ye are rég~zi mini , ye may

9-1 rég-fmti

’

xr, they are rég-éntfir, they may

S. rég-ébfir, I wa s reg

-era , I mightrég

-ébfir‘

i s, thou wast r‘

ég-érér

‘

i s, thou mightst ~5rég-éb§tfir, he was l

’ég he might 8

Pl. rég-ébai m i

’

lr, we wereré

’

g-érém fir, we might

rég ye wereYég

-érémini , ye mightrég

-ébfmtfir, they w ere rég-éréntfir, they might

S. réct- fi s sum , I was réct-l‘

i s sim , I mayréct-fis 68, thou wast réct-fis si s, thou maystréct-fis ést, he was ZS ré

’

ct-fis si t, he mayPl. ré

'

ct-i sfim fis, we were réct-i simfis, we mayréct-i ésti s, ye were réct-i si ti s, ye mayréct-i sfint, they were réct-i sint, they may

S. réct-fis éram , I had réct-fis éssem , I would

réct-fis érzi s, thou hadst"g; réct-fis éssés , thou wouldst g

réct-fis 6ri t, he had 3 réct-fis éssé t, he would 3 “

8Pl. réct-i ere

—111165, we had g réct-i éssémfis , we would 2

"S

v m v csrect- l ératl s, ye had 3 rect-1 essetl s, ye would g

réct-i 6r§nt, they had réc t-i Essént, they would

S. reg-fir, I shall

reg- (i ri s , thou shalt

rég-étfir, he shall

Pl. reg-émfir, we shall

rég-émini , ye sha ll

rég-éntfir, they shall

réct-fis en'

s , thou sha lt

réct-fis 6r‘

it, he sha ll

Pl. réct-i ér‘

im fis, we sha ll

réct- i eti ti s, ye shall

réct-i érfint. they shallhave

been

ruled

.

OR WORD-FORMATION.

CONJUGATION.

VOICE.

Imp erative Mood. Infinitive Mood .

r6g-6r6, r6g

-‘

i t6r, be thou

-V V

Vtub“or, let h im be

reg-1, to be rul l

r6g r6g be

r‘

ég-fint6r, let them be

ruled

.

réct-um 6536, to

have beenruled.

rec-tum h i , to be

about to be ruled .

rem-69, ruled.

r6g-6nd68, meet

to be ruled.

39

40 ACCIDENCE,

Ind icative Mood.

S. Aad-i b'

, I hear

afid-i s, thou hearest

afid-i t, he hears

Pl. afid-imfis, we hear

ufid-i ti s, ye hear

afid-i fmt, they hear.Present

Tense.

92

afid-i ébam , I wa s

afid-i ébés, thou wast

afid-i ébi t, he was

Pl. afid-i ébfim fis, we were

afid-i ébéti s, ye were

afid-i ébeint, they were

S. afid-i vi , I heard

afid-i vi sti , thou heardst

afid-i vi t, he heard

Pl. afid-i vim fis, we heard

afid-i vi sti s, ye heard

afid-i vérfint, they heard.

l

90

afid-i v6ram , I had

afid-i v6rzi s, thou hadst

afid-i v6r6t, he had

Pl. a i1d-i v6rei m i’

15, we had

a d-i v6r5ti s, ye had

aPreterp

l

uper

fec

u

fid-nerei nt, they had

afid- i am , I shall

afid-i és, thou sha lt

afid-i 6t, he sha ll

Pl. afid-i ém ii s, we shall

afid-i éti s, ye sha ll

afid-i ént, they sha llI

S. afid-i v6r6 , I shall

ai id-i v6ris, thou shalt

afid-i vé’

ri t,he shall

Pl. afid-i v6rim 1‘

i s, we shall

a ii d-i vériti s, ye shall

afid ~i v6ri r1t,they sha llF

uture

Perfect.

have

heard

.

THE FOURTH

ACT IVE

Conjunctive Mood.

afid-i am , I mayafid-i ei s, thou maystafid-i ét, he mayafid-i zi m tis, we mayefid-i ei ti s, ye mayefid-i eint, they m ay

afid-i rem , I mightafid-i rés , thou mightst

afid-i r6t, he mightafid-i rém fis , we mightafid-i réti s, ye mightafid-i rént, they might

afid-i v6rim , I mayafid-i v6ris, thou maystafid-i v6ri t, he mayafid-i vérimfis, we mayafid-i v6riti s, ye may

- v

afid-l ve rm t, they may

a ii d-i vi ssem , I would

afid-i vi ssés, thou wouldst

afid-i vi3s6t, he would

afid-i vi ssém fis, we would

afid-i vi sséti s, ye would

afid-i vi ssént, they would

aad-i tfirfis sim , I mayefid-i tfin

‘

i s si s, thou maystafld-i tfirfis si t, he mayafid-i tii ri si mfis, we mayafid-i tfiri si ti s, ye mayafid-i tfiri sint, they may

OR WORD-FORMA TION. 41

CONJUGATION.

VOICE .

afid-i , afid-i t6 , hear thou

afid-i tG, let him hear

afid-i t6, ai d—i t6t6, hear yeafid-i f t , let them hear.

Sup ines.

Infinitive blood. Particip les .

afid-i r6, to hear, or afid hearing.

afid-ivi ss6, to have

heard.

a'

fid-i tfirum 6886, to afid-i tfirl‘

i s, about

be about to hear.

aad-i tum , to hear

afid -i tfi , to be heard.

12 A001DENCE ,

THE FOURTH

PA SSIVE

Conjunctive Mood .

S. Afid-i 6r, 1 am afid- lar, [ mayafid-i ri s, thou a rt afid-i zi ri s, thou mayst 55afid-i tii r, he is aud-i zi tfir

,he may is

H . afid we a re afid-i ei m fir, we may i f

aud- im ini , ye a re afid -Izi mini , ye may 3efid-i fintfir, they are afid-i iintfir, they may

afid—i 6b6r, I was afid-i r6r, I mightafid-i ébéri s, thou wa st

"E aud-i réri s , thou m ightst

aud-i ébfitfir, he was i aud-i rétfir, he mightPl. afid-i 6b zi m i

’

1r, we were b )afid-i rém fir, we m ight

afid-i éh iimini , ye were 5. aud-i rémini , ye mightaud-i ébzintfir, they were “5 afid-i réntfir, they might

S. afid-i tfis sum , I wa s afid-i tfis sim , I mayafid—i tii s 6s, thou wa st afid-i tii s si s, thou mayst gafid-i tfis 6st, he wa s afid -i tfis si t, he may 3

"8

Pl. afid-i ti sfim fis, we were aud-i ti sim fis,we may 2g

afid-i ti 65ti s , ye were efid-i ti si ti s, ye may Eafid-i ti si nt, they were aud-i ti sint, they may

3 S. afid-i tfis 6mm , I had afld-i ti‘

i s 6ssem , I would

é aud-i tfis thou hadst“

g afid-i tfis 65565, thou wouldst

g. afid-i tii s 6rei t, he had 8 afid-i ti’

xs 6ss6t, he would“

5. Pl. afid-i ti 6rzi m 1‘

i s, we had"

2 aud-i ti 6556m 6 5, we would

g, afid-i ti 6rz'

1ti s, ye had g; afid-i ti 6556ti s, ye would

a: afid-i ti 6re’

m t, they had Qafid-i ti 6556nt, they would

S. afid-i tir, I sha ll

aud-i éri s , thou sha lt\afid-i 6t6 r, he sha ll

Pl. afid-i émfir, we sha ll

efid-i émini , ye shall

afid-i éntl‘

ir, they shall

S. afid-i tfis 616 , I sha ll

afid~i tfis 6ri s , thoushalt gaud-i tfis 6rit, he sha ll 3

"SE

Pl. afid-i ti 6ri 1n6 5, we shall g 3afid-i ti 6r

‘

iti s, ye sha ll gafid-i ti 6mm.theushall

44 ACCIDENCE ,

ON THE SIGNS OF THE TENSES.

‘

54. Most of the Tenses have more thanone Sign, or maybe put into English inm ore thanone way, though inthe foregoing tables only one is given.

SIGNS OF TENSES IN THE INDICAT IVE MOOD .

Pres. Am6, I love,or am lov ing .

Preterimp . Amabam ,I— loved

, or was loving , or used to love.

Preterperf. Amavi , I loved, or have loved.

Preterplup . Amav6ram ,I had loved.

Fut. Im p . Amabo, I sha ll or w ill love, or be loving .

Fut. Perf. Amav6r6, I sha ll or w ill have loved .

SIGNS OF TENSES IN TH E CONJUNCT IVE MOOD.

WHEN POTENTIAL.

Amem ,I may, or can

, or would, or should, or

could — love, or be loving .

Preterimp . Amarem , I— m ight, or would, or should, or could

love,or be loving , or have beenloving .

Preterperf. Amavérim ,I— may, or can

,or m ight, or would,

or should,or could have loved , or love.

Preterplup . Amav i ssem ,I m ight, or would, or should, or

could have loved.

Whenthe Conjunctive Mood is truly Subjunctive (that is to say ,

subjoined to governing Conjunctions or R elative Pronouns, )it oftenhas the sam e signs as the Indicative : as,

Lafidéib6ri s mo’

d6

Thou w iltbep ra ised if thou obeyest.

Lafid§b6r quum p drerem.

I was p ra ised when I obeyed.

Lafidfitl‘

i r qubd p driie'

rit.

H e is p ra ised because be obeyed

Lafidavi 6um qui pdrzi'

isse'

t.

I p ra ised him w ho had obeyed.

Note 2 . The Present Conjunctive is also used for the Imperative MOO639 ,

Act. Am em , may I love, or letme love.

Am 65, mayst thanlove, or love thou.

A m ét, may he love, 0 1‘ let h im love.

Am ém ii s, may we love, or let us love.

Am éti s , may ye love, or love ye.

Am ént.may they love, or letthem love

onWORD-FORMA TION. 46

Pass. Am 6r, may I be loved , or letme be loved.

Am bri s, mayst thanbe loved, or be thou loved.

Am 6t6r, may he be loved, or let him be loved.

A m émfir, may we be loved, or let us be loved.

Am 6mini . may ye be loved, or be ye loved.

Am 6nt6r, may they be loved, or let them be loved.

T h e Infinitive in re stands for the Preterim perfect as well as

for the Present Tense and the Infinitive in isse stands for

the Preterpluperfect as w ell as for the Preterperfect Tense as

( 1 ) Di ci t m 6 6m 6r6.

He says (that) I am loving .

Dixi t m 6 6m6r6.

IIe sa id (that) I wa s loving .

(2 ) i ci t m 6 6mavi ss6.

He says (that) I loved, or have loved.

i xi t m 6 6m zi vi ss6.

He said (that) I had loved.

VERBS IN IO OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION.

56. Verbs inio of the Third Conjugation, in the Tensesderived from the Present-stem , throw away i beforeanother i but keep it before a , o, u, and e

, exceptbefore er or e final : as, rapi

-b,rap

-6, rapi -fint,rap

-61 6, rapi-ébam ,

rapi -am ,rap

-6mm,rap

-i,rapi

ens, 850. These Verbs are the follow ing w ith their

compounds

Capi b, ciipi f) , facifi,Fli gib, f6dio,Rapifi, Spécio, quati l

'

i,Gri dibr, m6ri6r, poti6r, pati6r.

9 57 . VARIETIES or FORM.

a) The follow ing changes are made in the several Con

jugations, chiefly by the poets

I. Avis into as as, amasfi for am'

avisti ; amass6 for

amavi ss6.

Aver into ar as, amarfint for amavérfint ; amaramfor amavéram .

46 ACCIDENCE,

II. Evis into es as, impléssem for impl6vissem implesse

for implev'

i sse.

Ever into er as, implériint for imp16v6rfint ; impl6r6for imp16V6r6 .

IV. Iv into i ; as, afidiit for audiv‘

it ; aud‘

i 6runt for au

div6runt.

Iv is into its, or is ; as, afidiissé and afidissé for audi

v‘

Iss6.

N6vi , inthe Third Conjugation, changes w as into os ;’as, n6sti

for nc'

iv'

i sti : and over into or as, noram for n6v6ram . Pétlv'

i

from p6t6 , and desw 1 from d65‘

in6 , take the sam e changes as

Verbs of the Fourth Conjugation.

The Third Person Plural of the Preterperfect A ctive

oftenends inere’

instead of Erant; as,

Amavérfint or amavéré .

M6ni’

16runt or m6ni’

16r6.

Réxérfint or r6x6r6.

A fidivérfint or audiv6r6.

Note. We must not change dvé’

ré into art, or é'

vére’ into éréthus, amavére must not becom e amaré, nor implé véré

impléré, because these are the form s of the Infinitive.

In the Second Persons Singular of several Passive

Tenses, re is oftenput for ris as,

I. Amabari s or amabaré amabéri s or amabéré.

Améri s or ameré amar6ris or amaréré.

II. Manébaris or moné'

oaré mon6b6ris or m6n6b6r6.

Monéari s or mdnéare m 6n6r6ris or mon6r6r6.

III . R6g6ba'

ris or regébaré ; r6g6ris or r6g6r6.

Regaris or regaré r.6g6r6ris ,

or r6g6r6r6.

Audiébaris or afidiébaré audi6r‘

i s or ani6r6.Audiaris or aniaré ; afidir6ris or afidir6r6.

Note. It is not usual to w rite re for ris in the Second PersonPresent Passive, on account of the

'

confusionW i th Infin.

Act. and Imperat. Pass. But in Deponent Verbs th

change is less objectionable ; as, h6rt6r6 for hartar‘

i s.

(d) In the Passive Tenses formed w ith the Aux iliary Verbsum ,

fii i may be used for sum ; fii6ram for 6mm ;

fu6ro for 6r6 ; ffi érim for sim ; and ffiissem for 68

sem w ith a stronger past force as,

OR WORD-FORMATION. 4?

sum or ft’n', I was, or ha ve been

6mm or fiiéram ,I had been

6r6 or fiiérii, I sha ll have beensim , or fué

'

rim,I may ha ve been

6ssem ,or fi

’

fi ssem ,I should ha vebeen

(e) Di ce, dfico, facib m ake inthe Second PersonImperativedi c

,diic, fac .

f) The old Infinitive Passive inier for i, is sometimes used

by the ep ic poets as, amariér for amari .

(g ) The Participle in dus of 3d and 4th Conj . is sometimes

formed in undus as w ell as endus, especially that of

Verbs inia as fac‘

i éndtis or facifindfis .

PERIPHRASTIC CONJ UCATION.

58. The Participles inrus and dus may be conjugated w ithall the Tenses of the Verb sum and this is called

the Periphrastic Conjugation as,

A CTIVE VOICE .

(I ) am washave sha ll sha ll have

been be been

Amat'

uriis sum 6ram fii i 6r6 ffi 6r6

68 eras fn‘

i sti 6ri s ffiéris

6st 6rat fuit 6rit fiiérit

Amaturi siimiis 6ram 1‘

i s ffiim ii s 6rimtis ffiérim l‘

is6stis 6ratis ftii stis 6ritis ffiéritis

sunt 6rant ffiérfint 6runt ffiérint

And the other Moods inlike manner.

PASSIVE VOICE .

have sha ll sha ll have(I ) am was

been be beenAmandus sum 6ram fiii erb ffiéro

68 eras‘

filsti cris ffiéris

6st ériit fuit érit ffiérit

Arnr'

mdi sfimfis eram l‘

is ftiimfis 6rimfis faerim ii s

6st‘

i s 6rati s ffiistis 6ritis fuéritis

sunt 6rant fuerunt érunt fiiérint

And the other Moods inlike manner.

The Particip le indus is oftencalled the Gerundive.

ACCIDENCE ,

DEPONENT VERBS.

59 . Deponent Verbs follow the Passive Conjugation, buttake also Gerunds, Supines, and Participles A ctl ve.

Intransitive Deponents w ant the Supine in u, and

Participle indus.

( a ) CONJUGAT ION OF TR ANSITIVE DEPONENTS.

1

I exhort,

Hbrt-br

Hbrt-aris

Hbrt-atus sum

Hbrt-ari

H6rt~andi

Hart-andoH

’

ort-andum

Hort-atumHort-atfiHort-ansHort-atl‘i sHfirt-atfirl

'

i s

Hbrt-andli s.

2 3

Sp eak,

v6r-eor lbqu-or

v6r-6ris ldqu-éris

Ver-it1‘

is sum locu-tus sumver-6ri loqu

-I

ver-6nd‘

i loqu-éndi

ver-6nd6 loqu-6nd6

v6r-6ndum loqu-éndum

v6r-itum locfi -tum

V6r-itu lbcfi -tuy er-ens loqu

-énsver-

‘

1‘

tfis locu-tuslbcfi-tfirl

‘

i s

15qu-6ndfis.

y er-itfirfis

ver-6ndus.

4

d ivide.

part-ibr

part-iris

part-itus sum

part-iri

part-iéndi

part i6nd6

part-16ndum

part-itum

part-itu

part-iéns

part-Itfispart

-i tiirfis

part-iéndtis.

(a) CONJUGATION or INTRANSIT IVE DEPONENTS

l

I wander,

Vag-br

Vag-aris

Vag-atfis sum

Vag -ari

Vag -andiVeg-and?)Vag

-andumVag

-atum

Vag-ans

Veg-atfis

Vag-atfirfis.

4

fawn.

bland-ibr

bland-irisbland-itiis sun‘

.

bland-iri

bland-iéndibland-i6nd6bland-i6ndumbland-itum

bland-iénsbland-itusbland-itfirfis.

onWORD-FORMATION 49

VERBA DERIVATA ,DERIVED VERBS.

60 . I. Fréquentati va, Frequentative Verbs, express the

repetition of an action, are of the'

l st Conjugation, and end in-ito

,-to

,-tor : as

,rbg

-ito,I a sh

often, from reg m in-itor,I threa ten often,

from m in-or ; can-to, I sing often, from can-G.

II . Incéptiva or Inchoativa, Inceptive Verbs, express

the beginning of anaction,are of the 3rd Con

jugation, and end in-fiSC(3.

Some are derived from Verbs as,

Lab-6806 , I beg into totter from lab-6 , (lab-as).Pall-6806 , I turnp a le pan-66 , (pan-és).Trem -1806 , I beg into tremble ; trem -o, (tr6m -is).Se-i sco, I beginto know ; sci -6 , (sci s).

Some from Nouns as,

Pfiér-asco, I become a boy from puer.

M it I become mild m iti s.

III. D6sid6rativa, Desiderative Verbs, express the de

sire of anaction, are of the 4th Conjugation, ending in and derived from Supines in-um :as,

Es-firib, I am hungry ; from 6d6, és—um .

VERBA ANOMALA , IRREGULAR VERBS.

6 1. Irregular Verbs are such as do not form their Tensesaccording to the commonrules as,

( l ) P68sum , potes, potl‘

i i , posse, potfii sse, p6t6ns, to be able .

(2) V616 , vi s, volui , V6116, vbh‘

i i sse, voléndi , vbléndb, vblén

dum ,vbléns, to be w illing .

(3) N616 , n6nvi s, nolfii , 116116, nolfii ssé, nol6ndi , noléndi‘

)

nGa dum . nol6n8, to be unw illing .

(4) M616, mav is. ma'

lfii , mallé, malfiissé, maléndi , mal6nd6maléndum ,

maléns, to be more w illing .

(5) E6 , is, ivi, ire, ivissé, itfirum 6886, efindi , 6find6, eundum ,

itum ,itu

, efins or i6ns, itfirfis, to go .

(6) F6r6 , f6rs. tl‘

ili , f6rr6, tii lissé, latfirum 6886, f6r'

eh1di , f6r

6nd6, f‘

eréndum ,latum ,

latii , f6r6n8 , latfirfis, to bea r

(7) Fi fi, fi s, factfis sum ,fieri , factum 6886, factum iri

tactii s, faciéndti s, to become or be made.

(8) Férer, f6rr‘

1’

s, latus sum , f6rri, latum 6886, latum Iri,latus, f6r6nd1

‘

18, to be borne.

ACCIDENCE,60

A

3

5

same

£5-

59

Swa

mi»

ass

e

ss

ce

ra

maw

z

S

EE?

ca

se

s

?Awm

sal

s

a

San

dmm

Cflu

hs

u

52-

5:

sens»

8mmLa

ma

a

wfmm

rvu

3

dc

mu

£92

seam

sea

ms

new:

65>

mama

a

ne

w

umtwm

$23

5

an

fiwm

me

w.

“

a

a

52m”

:

m>=w=

$2215

a

?

we,

sang

ten

a

mpm

Seam

Be

am;

8

Seam-R

E

Emnw-_w

z

Eanw-_w>

Sea

man

seaE

e

sp

e

m

mu

m

sE2

wa

s

Esmmwm

52 ACCIDENCE ,

63. (0 ) Eds , I eat, 6dis or es, 6di , 6d6r6 or 6886,‘

edi se6,

P lur.

ésurum 6886, 6d6ndi , 6d6nd6 , 6d6ndum, ésum,

6sf1, 6d6ns, ésfirfis, to eat.

Pres. Indie. A ct.

Ed6, 6dis or és, 6dit or 6st

6dimfis, editis or ésti s, 6dfint.

Conjunct. P reterimp . A ct.

Ed6rem or 6ssem , 6d6r68‘

or 6sses, 6d6r6t or 6ss6t .

6d6r6mus or 6ss6mfis, 6d6r6tis or 6886tis, 6d6r6nt

or 6586nt.

Imp era tive Mood.

2d Per-s. Ed6 or 68 6dit6 or fast?)

3d Pers . 6d‘

i t6 or 68t6 ;

2d Pers . 6dit6 or 68t6, 6dit6t6 or 68t6t6

3d Per-s. 6dfint6 .

The other Tenses are regular : also the Passive Vo ice ; exceptthat ésti

‘

i r may he used for 6diti’

1r, and 6856ti’

1r for 6d6r6ti’

n‘.

VERBA DEFECTIVA ,DEFECTIVE VERBS.

64. Defective Verbs are such as want many of the usual

parts of aVerb.

(1) A i 6, I say and inquam ,

Ind ie.

A io

ai i'

m t. ai z'

mt

ai6bam

aiébasrl

ect

.

aiébat

aiébamusaiébat

‘

i s

a16b6nt

Indie.

Inq11aminquisinquitinquim iisinquitisinqui iint

inqulebaminquiébas

inquiébatinquiébamfisinqul

'

6bat‘

i8

inquiébant.

OR WORD-FORMATION. 53

P-r eterp erf. inqui eti , inquit, inqulstis,Fa t. Imp erf. Inquiés, Inqui6t.Imp er . inqu6, inquit6 ; Inquit6.Pa rt. of aiens.

65

Qué'

ese, I entreat ; l st Pars. PI. quéesumfis .

Fari, to sp eak used by the Poets inthis and a few

other form s,as fi tur, he sp eaks ; fabbr, I sha ll

eah f6 r6, sp eak thou Pa rt. (fans), fanti s, 800 .

tii s ; fandus ; Ger. fandi , fandfi Sup . fiitfi.

The Imperatives ;

Ap6g6, begone.

A vé, 6v6t6, ha il ; Infin. 6v6r6.

C6d6 , cédit6, or c6tt6, give me.

Sfilvé, salv6t6, ha il ; Infin. salv6r6 ; Fut. salv6bis.

V616, val6t6,farewell ; Infin. V616r6.

Afisim , afi si s, ausit afisint for afid6am,I

may da re.

“

El-K im , faxis, faxit, fax1m iis, faxitxs , faxint : for

faciam ,I may do, or f606rim ,

I m ay have done.

Also fax6,for faciam ,

I sha ll do, or f6c6r6, 1

sha ll have done.

Pra'

et6ritiva or Verbs conjugated only inthe Preterperfect and its derived Tenses ; co

‘

epi , I begin;6di, I hate m6mini , I remember .

CO‘

epi

Odi

Mémin'

i

Co‘

ep6ram cmpissem .

Od6ram 6di ssem .

M6m in6ram m6m inissem .

Gosp6r6 coeptiirum 6886 emptfirfis.Oderfi 6sfirum ess6 Gsfirfis.

M6min6r6 .

Imp er . Sing . M6m6nt6, P lur . m6m6nt6t6.

Obs . 1. For cb'

epi and its Tenses m ay be used the Passive cdeptfis sum

and its Tenses before an Infinitive Passive.

Obs . 2 . NGVI, I know, Preterp . ofn6506 , is also used as a Praeteritive.

64 ACCIDENCE,

(7) ImpersonalVerbs are conjugated only inthe ThirdPersons Singular of the Proper Moods, and inthe Infinitive Mood.

A . ImpersonalVerbs A ctive have no PassiveVoice. The

principal of these are of the 2ud Conjugation.

Op6rt6t, ts'

edét, mis6r6t,Pig6t, pt

’

idét, pc‘

enit6t,Lib6t

,lic6t, liqu6t, et

D6e6t atqu6 d6d606t.

V V

6p6rtt’

1i 886.

Fut. Perfl

The Persons are expressed by the Cases following theVerbas,

Sing . Op6rt6t m e, it

Op6rt6t té,Op6rt6t 6um ,

Plur. Op6rt6t 1168,Op6rt6t v68 ,Op6rt6t 66s,

And so inthe other Tenses.

68 . B . Intransitive Verbs may be used impersonally inthe

Passive Voice : as, lfiditl‘

ir, from 1fid6, I p lay.

Conjane. Infin.

Lfiditiir Ifidatfir

Preterimp . Lfidébatiir lfid6r6ttir.

Preterp erjfl Lfisum 6st lii sum sit Ifi sum 6886.

Lfisum 6rat lfisum 6ss6t lfisum ffiiss6.

Lfid6ti’

1r ldsum iri.

Fut. Perf. Lfisum 6rit.

P res . Indie.

behoves me, or I am behoven.

thee,

or thou a rt

him, o r he is

us,

or we are

you, or ye are

them,or they are

OR WORD FORMATION. 55

The Persons are expressed by anAblative Case w ith the

Prepositiona or ab follow ing the Verb as,

Liiditiir 6. m6, it is p layed by me,Lfiditfir 6 t6,Lfiditiir ah 66, him, or

Lfiditl‘

ir an6bi 8 us, or

Liiditfir a v6bi s, you or

Lfidittir ab 6i s, than or

And. so inthe other Tenses.

69 . C. The Neuter of the Gerundive Participle inis used impersonally, inthe same manner, w itha Dative or A blative after it to mark the

sons as,

S.L1'

1d6ndum 6st mihi , itmust be p layed by me, or I

Liid6ndum 6st tibi, thee, or thou

Liid6ndum 6st 61, him, or he

RLfidéndum 68tn6bi s, itmustbep layed by us, or w e

Liidendum 6st v6bis, you, or ye

Lfidéndum 6st 6is, them, or they

And so inthe other T enses.

( The Particles are treate d of inother parts of th is Grammar

I p lay.

thou p layest.

he p lays .

we

ye p lay

I. OF THE GENDER OF NOUNS

70. A . GENERAL RULES.

( 1 0 )v v

uli , etD ivi ,Ve

'

nti,

ensés,M6ntés,R iviG6n6ris stintMascfilinl.

P ldnté, Divé , Fé

'

minae'

,

Térr‘

ce'

, Urbés, Ins illw‘"

V V V

Generl s sfintF6m‘

1'

nini .

Vfix ind6cltnabilisNeiitri ‘

us 6st G6uéris.

B . OF GENDER IN THE DECLENSIONS.

I. FIR ST DECLENSION:

PRINCIPAL RULE .

A 6t 6 suntFemininé I As 6t Es sfintMasculine.

EXCEPTIONS.Mascli l

'

infi sfint Ina Ut nau'

td’

, ve‘

rnd 6t po'

étd.

Mascfilérum 0 61111116, Sctlrrd, 43c 6tprdphétd.

(4)Shut C6mmun1s G6u6risCiv is

, héstis ,juve'

nis,Testis, J ude-iv, a rtifE-r ,Auctor

,ezrsul

, op ifex,Comes

,hé

'

res, h6sp es, d-ilx,

Obsé'

s, interp res, conjux,

Incola,sa cerdés, v index,

infants, inde'

x,

p dr, custbs,Municép s, stitélles, b6s,M iles,

va tes, augur, g rus,Cams , tigr is , serp ens, sus

v 0

Dame-z,talp a jungimus.

GENDER or nouns. 57

II. SECOND DECLENSION.

PRINCIPAL RULE.

Masciilini s ils 6t é'

r,

Vefitris um tribultfir.

EXCEPTIONS.

( 1 ) F6m‘

inin6 stint‘

lnils (2 ) Neii tr6 viriis , pélc‘

z'

gfia.

Alvils , drcti‘

i s , cdrbli s iis , Villg ii s f6r6 Neiitrum sit,

Cblils, hilm iés, m6th6d its ; M i scfilum sfib’

md6 fit.

III. TH IR D DECLENSION.

(a ) FIRST PRINCIPAL RULE .

Masctili s ins6r1tur EtN6m6u d68‘

1'

n6ns ines

Quéd claudit 0 , or, as, v61 er, Si fl6ctit 0686 8 impar68.

EXCEPTIONS.

( 1) I116 F6m‘

in‘

in6 s i’

m t E qullr. mitrmlir, c6r

Indo 6t go qué désinfint Fémini uum 6st drb6r.

86d Masctil‘

inli m 6n6nt cdrdb,LigG, (Jr/16 6tqu6 mc

'

irgb. (5 ) Féminin‘

a’

c63 6t dbs,Nefitrfi sfint i

’

Itrfimqu6 as.

(2 ) Si'

mt Inio F6m1n1n6V

T z'

intum ma Mascfilinii , (6) lfeuff i‘ multesum 1"6”

Qué v6l 6c i'

11'

1’

s sp6ct6b‘

i s,1 63:ber, £2

167.a cér

,’V6] tii m én

‘

ibfis triictfib‘

i s.6” i t S

a‘fa ve”P ip er, i tér, 6t papavér.

(3) as»?(Cf-

Em?) m évfilt 55 (7 ) 1733 6st Neiitrum 861: Inas

Fem imm s add6r6. Qua'e fl6ct1‘m t cfisfis imp itrésF6mInin6, cbmp

‘

é s , te’ge's

,

(4 ) Nei'

xtrii paficl siint Inor MErcés, mé'

rgé’

s, quié'

s, sEgE'

s .

74. (b) SECOND PRINCIPAL RULE .

F6m‘

1’

nTnIs Ins6r68 S cum e6ns6uant6 u6xa,Qua

‘

s claddiint is as, aus 6t Es a'

equalit6r infiéxa.

58 GENDER or NOUNs.

( l M f1 1t6 sfint qua'e clafidi t is (3) M itsclil'

in’

a’

sfint”

ini tMei sc illini G6n6r

‘

is , FGrnix, p hé’

mix 6t cc‘

ilia:

Amnis , dx is . crillis , cOllis,Ca ii lis , citcum is 6tf611is ,

(4) M i scfilinii shut in(i s

Ignis, Gribi s atqu6 cr inis , Vds (mi d is ), g igds , elép hds,

Pants, p i eci s, posti s . e’

ns i s, A s (assts), mci s 6t addmds ,Se

'

ntis , cQ-rbis . t6rquis , mé’

ns is, Neiitré, vii-c (cri sis) , nefd s, fdaTb

'

rris , linguis 6t ca’ndlis,

Ve'ctis, vErmis 6t sbdzi li s ,

Cdssis , cinis , glis 6t dnguis,Ltip is, p iilvis 6tqu6 sa

'

nguis.(5) Mi sciilini s 6dd6 m6ns,F6ns 6t t6rréns, gry

‘

p s 6t p6 7” ,

Bil/lens , hye p s , déns 6t bi de'

ns

(9 ) Pl6r6qu6 qua'

e clafidit ca:6005413728 ét tridéns.

Me’

i scfi liné shut, i ng ré’

x

Séd Fém ininz‘

i m iinént né'

x, (6 ) blascfilinfi shut ines

S iléx, cdrér , 16x. Vé‘

rré’

s 6t deindcé’

s.

75 . (c) THIRD PRINCIPAL RULE .

Neiitra clafidfint a 6t e, 1 A r,ur

,us

,e,l,n 6t t

EX CEPTION S.( I ) Masc i

‘

ilinfi sfint‘

ina r (4) Est 6t p6czi s (p i c r‘

ldis )V V v

FIllfll-T, ti‘

trti‘

ir, vitltitr, f12r. F6minini Generi s .

(2 ) M i scfiliné sfint inus

Lap-ts (le’

p oris) 6t m ice(5 ) Mascfilit inI shut mug il,

C6ns iil, sdl, 861 fitqu6 p ilg il

(3) F6m‘

inin6 shut“

in71 3

Virtzis 6tqu6 sErvit s , (6 ) Masc ii linii sfint re'

n, sp le'

n,J z

‘

événtits, incus atqu6 pdlfis , Péctizn, délp hin, dtta'

gén.

Se’néctus, te

'

llits 6tqu6 sa'

lits ,

Quibfis l6ng6 m anét u ( 7 F6m‘

inin6 s'

fint‘

inon

InG6n‘

i ti vi tri msi tfi . Gfirgbn, s indbn, hc’

i lcy‘

Dn.

IV. FOURTH DECLENSION.

PRINCIPAL RULE .

Masctili s inQuartitus, NefitrIs a tribfiimiis.

EXCEEI‘IONS.

FémInI-ni shot In123 its , [dds 6tqu6 mdniis ,

Qui rté ddmiis, pbrtic iis, rile, socriis, dnus,

60 PRETERPERFECTS AND SUPINES

EXCEPTIONS( l ) Hinc 6xc

‘

ipi 6nd6 sfint

Que ii i itum éfl'

érfint :Cré

’

p 6, ciib6 6tqu6 36n6,d 6, vé

’

l6 6tqu6 t6n6.

(2 ) S606 sé’

cili 6tqu5 sé'

ctum ;

Fric6frici1i 6tqu6fi ictum.

(3) J i m?ji vi jfltum stfit ;

II. SECOND CONJUGAT ION OF A CTIVE VERBS

V6rb6rum A ltéra C6njngat16,Cui 66 6s 6ré t6rmin6ti6 ,Ui inP6rf6 ct6 fit,SfipinO itum sfibjicit

(M6n-60, mOn‘

es, m6n-6r6, m6n-m ,m6n-itum.)

EXCEPTIONS( l ) H inc 6xciplénd6 siintQuae 6vi 6tum 6lf6ri

'

m t

Ut 7166 n6vi 6tqu6 n6tum

176166 d6l-6vi -6tum.

A dd6flé’

6 , p lé’

6,hi s,

Et 6166, cum 06mp6si ti s.

(2 ) Hi s ind i P6rf6 0tum sti t,

Sum Sii pinum t6rm in6t.

P 1 dudi p rdnsum p rdndé’

6

S6d'

i s6ssum s6d66

Vid i visum vidé’

6.

86d sp6nd66 sp6p 6nd i sp 6nsum

T6nd66 t6t6ndi t6nsum

M6m6rd i m6rsum m6rd66

Pé'

p 6nd i p 6usum p 6ndé'

6 .

H i s inSi P6rfé ctum f i t,

Sum Siipinum 6xi gi t.

J ilss‘

i ji ssumju'

b66

M illsi mi l-sum millcé’

6

Dfit, Iti démqu6 miilgé'

6

Té'

rsi t6rsum t6rg66

Arsi fir-sum drd66

R is i ri sum ridé'

6

Sudsi sud-sum su6d66

Mdnsi mdnsum mdné’

6

H é si hé sum lac-

eré'

6.

Sic 6t dlg6'

6 dls i dint,14161966fi ls i vindi citt

Ldvb ldvi 16mm (l i t,Et Ili vci tum vindi c itt.

DO fi t de’

di 6tqu6 ddtimt,

Sta fi t sté’

ti 6tqu6 statum.

M ic6 dfit P6rf6ctum micifl.Plic6 d6t P6rf6 0tum p lied !Nfillum f6rt Stipinum mica,o dtum d6t v6l -itum p lic6.

Urg66 i tem drs i fi t ;

86d h i s Sfip inum d6fi ci t.

(4 ) Dim s’

i 6t tum indti l~g66,Et t6r-si t6r-tum tor-qué

'

6 .

(5 ) Ai g66 a tlxi aflctum fi t ;

Frig66 frixi s ii sci p‘

i t :

L i gé’

6 , 127066 , litr i dint,S6d n6nSfipinum g6n6r6nt.

( 6 ) H ziec P6rf6 0t6 v6lfmt vi ,

Tum Sti pinO sfifi‘

i ci

06 066 cdvi 6tqu6 ca lltum

d é6 fdvi fitqué fa lltum176 066 j6 vi 6tqu6j6 tumM6126?) m6vi 6tqu6 m6tum

V6v66 v6vi 6tqu6 v6tum.

(7 Hi s i i inP6rf6ct6 st6t,

T um Siipinum t6rmin6t.Ditt ddcé’6 d6ctum di tmistum mis

cé’

o s6rptum

S6rbé’

o f i t t6u66 t6ntzim fi t t6rr€a

t6stum.

(8) Hi s Préét6ri tum P6ssi v6,

Prz'

es6ns scri bi t‘

ur A cti vé ;Afide

’

6 d6t a zi sti s sum

Ga i dé’

6 g ii vis tls sum

S6166qu6 sdlitfls 8m

PRETERPERFECTS AND SUPINES. 61

8 ] III. THIRD CONJUGAT ION OF ACT IVE VERBS.

V6rb6rum T6rti6. C6njug6ti6,Cui , 6 is 6ré t6rm in6ti6 ,P6rf6 ctum varies f6rma

‘

3 ditt,Tum v61 sum Supin6 stat.

(R6g-6 , r6g-is, r6x

-i , r6g-6ré, réct-um .)

Sp ecial Rules with

g 82. (a ) B6 6t p 6 .

B6 , p 6 b6h6ut additum

P6rf6 ct6 ps i , S‘

t’

IpinOp tum

Ut ni b6 nflp si 6tqu6 nzlp tum .

EXCEPTIONS.Rump6 t6m 6nriip i rflptum

M O bibi bibitum

Str6p 6 stré'

p i i str6p itum.

(b) C6 , 516, h6, qu6 .

C6, g6 , h6 , qu6 , si c d601in6 ,X i P6rf6 0t6 , ctum SfipinOUt ddc6 dilxi 6tqu6 d i ctum

Sdg6 sfixi 6tqu6 sfictum

R é'

g6 ré'

xi 6tqu6 r6ctum

Vé’

h6 v6wi 6tqu6 v6ctum.

EXCEPTIONS.Se6 P6rf6 0t6 j i’1b6t vi ,Tum Siipinfi s i

'

i‘

ici

Ut or6so6 cré'

vi cr6tum su6sco

Su6vi su6tum si c qv i63c6 .

N6sc6 n6vi n6tum dat ; EXCEPTIONS .

figsc

zpa

a

v

i‘fia s

éum

é

stav

t: ( l ) Quae 6x6i

'

1nt in6nd6, 6nd6,mp 30 0 mp 302 “

F16ct6 do‘

ind i v6rt6nd6 .

P6p 6sci p 6sc6 d i sc6 d idici .P6nd6 fi t p é

’

p 6nd i p 6usum

(2) [cam atqué 50mmTends dat t6t6nd i t6nsum.

VincO vioi 6tqu6 vi ctum

L inqu6 liqui 6tqu6 lictum.

(8 ) Pdrc6 d6t p6p 6rci pdrsum.

(4) Sp d’

rg6 sp drsi 6tqu6 sp c'

irsum

M6rg6 m6rsi 6tqu6 m6rsumth at i tqué ti c

-sum.

their E xcep tions .

(5) Ag6 6g i 6tqu6 dictum ;

Frdng 6 fr6g i 6tqu6 frdctumTdng 6 té

'

tig i 6t te'

totum

Pdng6 p 6p ig'

i 6t p dctum

S6d cOm pOstiI-p e

'gi -p dctum ;

Pi ng/6 p ilp ilg i ét p i nctum ;

J i ng6jiinxi fitqu6ji nctum.

L6g6 l6g i vindi c iit,C6mp68tum 86 3

136 d6t.

( 6 ) Fig6 f ix'

i f ixum f ing6Fin-T i fitqué fi ctum p ing6P inr i fii ei t 6tqu6 p ictumString6 strinxi 6tqu6 strictum.

(c ) D6 .

D6 P6rf6 0t6 ji’

lb6t st,

Sum SixpinO sfiflfi ci .

La-

zsi lcie'

sum fzi ci t 1&d6

(V6rum c6ss i c6ssum c6d6

i c il-lidfi J ISI -lisum

D ivid6 d i -vi si -vi sum.

(2 ) Find6 t6m6nf idi f i ssum ;Scind6 scid i 6tqu6 scissum

Fi nd6 l d i 6tqu6f dsumTl

'

indb'

tiltildi 6t tit-sum.

Cfid6 cildi 6tqu6 ci sum 3

Odd6 cé'cid i 6t cdsum ;

Cc'

6d6 fi t cé’

cid i caisson5Fi c

‘

it é’

d6 Edi 63am.

62 PRETERPERFECTS AND SUPINES.

( 3) M , M . c6nd6 , cr6d6 ,Obd6, p6rd6, r6dd6 , 6d6 ,

Pr6d6 , trdd6 , 06nd6, d6d6,Qazia 6 d6 c6m p63t6 sum,

Dé'

d6 de'

didi 6t dé'

d'

itum.

(d) To.

Flé'

ct6fl6fi 6tqu6fi61'um

M att? 1162 1 6tqu6 né'

r um ;

Pé’ti vi 6tpé'

itum pé 6

m a m -meta ;M itt6 mist mi sswndi t

V6rbum qu6d 6 sist6 fit

P6rf6ct6 -stifi sfifi‘

ici t.

5 88 . (e) So.

so a s: sitam fi t ; 6rc6336

Si c f6 rm zi ti’

1r, 6t 1666336 .

Vis6 vi si vindi cfit ;P ins6 p insiii p i stum d6t.

84. (f ) X0 .

Unum in3 6 t6z 6 stét,

Qu6d tat-iii tfi tum vincfici t.

s 85 . (9 ) LO.

L6 1171 tum : si c c6asill6

86d cb’

lii i 6t ciiltum c6’

l6,

A c6116 v6rb6 c6llii i

P666 pé'

p iili 6tpfilswm

76116 with (vfils i ) vfllsm

Psd'

IZo p sfilli 36116 sdlsum

T6116 si sti ili f6 rm6tum

InSii pin6 fit si bldtum.

( 11) Mo.

Mb mui mitum fi t ; iitfi énbFré ufii fré

’mitm ; si c gé'

mif,

Et Sixpin6 0616113 tr6m6

Ff6m6 pr6ms i 6tqu6 pr6mtm ;

Si c fléctfintii r 312ml}, d6m686d 6mi i tqu6 6mtum 61716

Pré'

ss i 6tqu6 p ré'

sswnpré'

mb.

(Int6r m 6t 3 v6] tLi tini sé pé p6m

'

1ntp .

Si c fi fint si mpsi , démp si , démp

W “ )

( i ) No.

Gignfl génfi i gé'

nitm

P 6n6 pds ii i pdsitwn

T6mn6 t6msi t6mtum (li t ;St6rn6 sh ift-i stratum sti t.

Spé'

rn6 sp ré'

vi atqu6 sprétm ,

C6m 6 cré'

vi atqu6 cram ;

L!n6 l6v'

i 6tqu6 litm ;

SIRE) sivi 6tgn6 situm.

Si cum vi néctéudi stét.

§ 8 6 . (k)

J dci6 j6c i 6tqu6 yam"

Dfint 6 ldei6 161 i I6! tumEt 6 spé

’

ci6 spé'

z i spé'

ctwn

Cdpi6 ce‘

p‘

i t u6 cd'

ptmu

Rd'

p'

iti rd'

p il'

i 6t rdptm

(j) R 6.

V6rr6 0617 1 6tqu6 vérsum

Gi n-6 di t ciicti rri ci rsum

Quart Fit qua-3m -situm

Té'

ro tri vi 6tqu6 tritum

Ur6 i ss i fistum st6t

G6r6 gEssi géstum (li t ;F6r6 tiili 6tqu6 ldtumS6r6 s6vi 5141115 sdtum;

PRETERPERPECTs AND SUPINES. 63

Cup-ivi -itum ciip i6 V6 infl6cti t vi 6t i tum

Pé'

pé’

ri p c'

irtum pdri6 Ut 36106 86l 6t sd’

li tm

Qudti6 quds sum vindi cfit, V6lv6 v6lvi 6t vdliitum.

86d inc6mp65ti s ci ssum dilt.

EXCEPTIONS.171276 t6m6nfl ilrumfl i t !

8 ' (I) U6 61:v6.

Stril6 stri ctum 6tqu6 stri z 'i

U6 f6 rm6t iii fitam Viv6 vixi victum d6t ;

Ut tribu'

6 tribu'

i tribiitum. Stinga6 stinxi stinctum st6t.

IV. FOURTH CONJUGAT ION OF A CT IVE VERBS

V6rb6rum Qualrtit C6njtgittio,Cui i6 is i ré

’

t6rmin6ti6,Ivi inP6rf60t6 fit,Sfipin6 itum sfifl i cit.

(A im-16, afid-is, afid-ir6, and-Ivi , aud-Itum .)

EXCEPTIONS.St

'

inci6 sdnxi sdnctum fi t

N60 -civi -citttm résp ii i t.

Vim i vinctum vinci6

Sdrci6 fi t sdrsi sdrtum

Fdrci6qu6fdrsi fli rtumAmici6 dmicii i d6t;Sd

'

li6 sdlii i (sdlii ) stiltAt singfilti6 s ingtlltum

Et sé’

p6li6 sé’

p illtum

V. DEPONENT VERBS

D6p6n6nti6 fl6x6risEx A cti v6rum r6g i

’

11is

Nam Pra’

6t6ritum Pi ssi vum

Sfipin'

i 68t D6r'

ivé-tivum .

EXCEPTIONS.

( I) SECOND CONJ UGATION. THIRD CONJ UGA TION.

R66r rdttis 6fi‘

ici t ; L6b6r ldp siis siisci p it

M sé’

ré'

b'

r misé'

rtiis fi t ; Utb’

r i s iis éfi'

i cit ;t é

’

d’

rfi ssils flécté si s

Fé'

ssi s inc6mp6si ti s.

Vé'

ni6 v6ui v6ntum fi t

( V6né'

6 v6nii sii sci pi t)S6p i6 sé

'

p si s6ptum dfit

A p 6rio -p é

’

r1i i -p6rtum sti t

86d c6mpé’

ri6 c6mpé'

ri

Et ré’

p é’

ri6 ré'

pp é’

ri .

Hafi s i ha ilstum hafiriO

Sé'

ns i sénsum 86nti6.

64 CHANGES OF VERBS IN COMPOSITION.

Nild’

r ni sils nixu'

s stilt

Irdtzi s sum irdscb'

r dii t

Qa6r6r quéstiis grlid id’

r gré'

s

V

8 218

Pdtidr pdssu'

s sum , 6t -p 6ssils

Inc6m p68ti s ; fit illciscdr

Ultiis 6p tils sum dp iscdr

86d ddé'

ptiis ddip isc6r

Prd’

f ic iscé’

r fitp rb’

fl ctzis

Exp é’

rg iscdr 6xp 6rr6ctiis

Fi t 6blitiis 6bli viscd’

r

Et c6mm6ntzis c6mminisc6r

36d ndnc’iscb’

r fzi eit nci chi sEt pdciscd

’

r fii ci tp i ctii s.

M6rtu'

u'

s sum f6ci t mdrib’

r ;

c'

iscOr nci tu'

s 6rtils dridr

Quei s Ffitfirii mdritti riis ,Ndscitii rii s, 6ritu

'

ru'

s .

FOUR-TH CONJ UGATIONQufirté m6n-9121

'

s m6ti6r

F6rm6t 6rs ii s 6rdi6r

A t 6xp é’

ri6r 6xp6rt‘iis ,

Et 6pp éri6r 6pp 6rtiis .

g go. VI. INCEPTIVE VERBS.

( l ) A V6rbi s dfictfi Inc6pti v6Fl6x6ris fit Primi ti vfiSi c 6xdrs i 6r drd6sc6 ,

(2 ) F6ct6rum 6X N6mini bfisP6rf6 cti s ii i t6rminfisEvdn6306 sic 6v6nili

0 b3616vi 6bsd’

l6sc6

Tré’

m iii vindi cét tr6mi sc6

Et réscivi fi t réscis c6.

C6nsdn6-se6 fi t cOnsd'

nili .

P16 rim6 Stipini s c6r6nt,P6rf6 ct6 m ii lti s n6n6pp6r6nt

VII. IM PER SONAL VERBS.

86d misé'

ré'

t mis6rtum 6'

st

L'

ibe'

t libu’

it libitum 6st

Tdadé’

t ditt p 6rtEésum 6st

Vel tc6diiit si c p igé'

tfi t

Pig itum 6st 6t p ig ilit.

Imp6r86n61i6 fl6x6ris

EX P6rs6n61‘

ium r6gt’

11i s

Si c p iidé’

t fécit p it'

d ii it

Pfénité'

t p ii'

enitii it

0p 6rté’

t si c 6p6rtit'

it.

VIII VERBS WANTING PRETERPERFECTS ANDSUPINES.

M filtfi queia P6rf6 0t6 c6r6ut,L6ctit6nti bi

’

1 8 6pp6r6ntIn6p6ri bfis Liitini s,Mfiltfi V6rb6 qua

'

e Sii pini s,

91. IV. OF THE CHANGES OF VERBS IN

COMPOSITION .

Gra'

did’

r, pdtib’

r, p drtidr, trdcth

Pdri6, pa tr6 , 6tqu6 cdnd6 ,

Sacr6, spd'

rg6. 6tqu6 scdndG.

( l ) A ine c6nv6rt6risH6rum inCOmp

‘

isi ti s

A rcé’

6, adrp 6 , ddmnb, teas,

t iscdr, f6116 , fdrci6 , jd'

ct6,

PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION.

(2 ) A Ini c6nv6rt6risH 6rum inC6 1np68Iti sAgb, cd’db, ca’nb, fr6ng6,Hdbéb, ldt

‘

c'

b, f6‘

té6r, p dng6,Sdlib, stdtz

‘

tb, 6tqu6 tdngb,Cdp ib, ra

’

p i b, sa’

p ib, filcib,J dci ir, ldc

‘

i o, p iece-3, tdcéb.’

Exc6p t6 : p érdgb, p érp ldc‘

r’

o

E tcum Advér i i s m i stum fl c‘

ib.

(3) A inu 06nv6rti t6

E x 06106, saltb, quc‘

tt‘

tb.

(4) E Ini c6nv6rt6risH 6rum inC6mp6si ti s :Eg i

'b, ti'néb, 6tqu6 Emb,

Sp i ci b, s i dkb, 6tqu6 p rémb,

Add6 d‘

t’

di 6tqu6 légb,

A dd6 steti 6tqu6 régb.

Sfmt 6xc6pt6 7 6169 6,

Pérlégb, 6t 197 63169 6 .

Nota .

Si , m fi t6t6 Simpli ci ,C6mp68ti Praiaséns sfim si t i ,

(5 ) E In5, 6. queero, 026610

65

C6mp68t6, m fi tiint, 6t 6 lé dix.

(6) A li in6 06nv6rti t pla zi doA il init c6mm i

’

1t6t cla itdb

Au In6 8616mm 6d6

EX a i di b dii t bbéd ib.

(7 ) R 6duplIc§ti 6 Sim pli ci sExi hi t 6 C6mp 68i ti s

Si c 6 p éllb, p ép i’

tft,

Fi t imp éllo, imp l’

tli .

56d 6 d i scb, p 6sc6, dd

C6mp68t6 sérvei nt, 6t 6 stb.

592. OF PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION

( 1) Con fi t Pra'

ep6sItI6 cum,

QuaindO st‘

at c6mp6si tum .

( 9 ) T iintum InC6mp 6s‘

i ti s

Stfiut dmbi , ri‘, 36, sus , 6t dis.

(3) Prs'

ep6si ti 6 t6rmIn6ntemSa

'

ep6 m fitii t 06ns6n6ntemi c , i

’

It fi ii t s imi li s

C6ns6n6nti Sim plIcIs

Ut dd -fEr6 fi t (ifi'

érii,

Ut in-Iin6 fi t i llinz .

Ut rib-pwi fr. 514mm

(4 ) N Inm c6nv6rti t6

Ant6 b v6] 6nt6 p .

Ut c6n-bib6 f i t c6m-b‘

ib6,

Ut iu-

p lic6 fi t im-

p li cii.

5 ) A li 6 6 i é trzinsf6 ri'

1nt,Qua

-

e r616t1'

1 lOng z‘

i s i mt

Unum h60 n6t6ndum (16,Ab-f i

‘rci fi t a iifi t'6 ,

Ab-fc‘

tgt6 fi t atlas/Ia.

InP'

e'

rféctfi sfim ét c

Si 16ng6m vélét fingéréi c d ijfici é fi t d iféciSi c p rbj

‘

i ci fi p réjéciSi c cfinsp icib cbnsp cx

'

i

Si c 6 d i rigb d i réxi .

Perg?) (pEr-régb) pErrEz iSi ng?) (sfis-régb) sfirréxt

P érr‘

igb (prO-régb) pbrréxt.

SYNTAXIS MINOR,

TIRUNCULORUM GRATIAM CONCINNATA.

93. A . I. ADJ ECTIVA , Participia, et Pronom ina cum Substantlvis suis genere, numero, et casu concordantut.

Nullus ad amissas ibit amieus ap es .

l . Substantivum per ellipsinintellig itnr : ut,

Laborem p lerique fug iunt. ( supple homines . )

2 . Neutra Adjectiva Substantivorum vice funguntur : ut,Omnium rerum more est extremum.

II. Verbum finitum concordat cum Nominatlvo numero et

persona: ut,

Omnia vitia contra naturam p ugnant.

I A liquando Infinitivus, vel Locutio aliqua, pro Nom inative poniturut,

Nonestmentiri meum.

Incertum est qudm longa vita futura sit.

2. Nom inativus Pronom inum rarOexprimitur : ut,

Nitimur invetitum semper cup imusque negata.

Nisi distinctioni vel emphasi inserviat : ut,

Ego reges gjeci vos tyrannos introdumtur.

Impersonalia Nomm ativum nonhabent expressum : at,

d et ip sum vehementerque p aemtet.

4. Personae Verbi sum seepé intelliguntur : ut,

Nihil bonum nisi quad honestum. (suppie 0d .)

SYNTAXIS MINOR .

4. Verbum ,inter duos Nom inativos positum , Interdum cum p osteriore

so lo concordat : ut,

Amantium irce amaris integratio est.

5 . Relativum , inter duo Substantiva ejusdem rei collocatum , cum posteriore solo saepé concordat : ut,

Thebae, quad Bceotiaz cap ut est.

6. Substantivo, Pronom ini, et interdum Sem entiée, ap

poni potest Substantivum ejusdem rei in eodem

casu : ut,

Efi odiuntur ap es, irritamenta ma larum .

Nos consules desumus .

Cog itet ora torem institui, rem a rduam.

7. Cum duo Substantiva diversarum rerum concurrunt,alterum inGenitivo ponitur ut,

R ecubans sub tegm inefag i.

§94 C. I. Verba Transitiva regunt A ccusativum pro

pioris Objecti : ut,Sp erne volup ta tes .

i s venerareDeum.

l . Verba quaedam Neutra et Passiva A ccusativum adm ittunt suse

operationis : ut,

Duram servit servitutem .

Claudius a leam lus it.

2 . Verba quaedam , ragandi praesertim et docendi , duplicem habent A c

cusativum : ut,

Pacem te p oscimus omnes .

Quid nunc te, a sine, litteras doceam

a . Plurima ex his inPassivéVoce retinent A ccusativum rei 1

Matus doceri gaudet Ioniens .

8 , A ccusativus R espectfis Grseco m ore subj‘icituv tum Verbis Neutrilet Passiv is, tum Adjectivis : ut,

M icat auribus et tremit artus.

Inficitur teneras tota rubare gem”

Nudce sunt brachia .

S YNTAXIS MINOR. 6s

4. A ccusativum regunt has Praepositiones

Ante, ap ud, ad, adversus, Prop e, p ropter, p er, secundum.

Circum, air-eu, citra , cis , Sup ra , versus , ultra , trans 3

Contra , inter , erga , extra , H is sup er, subter, addito ,Infra , intra , juxta , ob, Et in, sub, Si fit mo tio ,

Penes, p ane, p ost, et p rceter,

II . Vocativus, A ppellati casus, regitur ab Interjectionevel expressa, vel intellectfi z ut,

l. Interjectiones enet ecce regunt A ccusativum atque Nom inativum : (I,

ah, heu, hem, p rob, A ccusativum , Nom inativum, et Vocativum :

ut,

Enmiserum hom inem !

E cce nova turba atque rixa I

H eu miserande p uer !

H eu vanitas humana

Proh Deum atque homiuumfidemP rob sancte J upp iter

2. Dativum regunt hei et w e ut,

Hei misera mibi I

Vce tibi, causidice l

Omnia fereA djective etVerba, item Adverbie et Sub

stantive, regunt Dativum remotioris Objecti, cujuscausfi. est aut fit aliquid ut,

Nonsolum nobis divites esse valumus.

Mihi istia nee seritur nee metitur.

Numa uirg iues Vesta? leg it.Urbi p a ter est urbique ma ritas .

a . Ita sum po ssess ive significans Dativum p ossidentis habet : ut,

E stmihi uamque domi p ater, est injusta noverca .

Dativum regunt p lurim a A djectiva, Adverbia , eu Verba,interdum

etiam Substantive , a quibus indicatur

Commodum,communicatio, Trad itio, venia, demonstratzo,

Comp aratio, consecratio, Promiss io, fides, et narratio,Congruentia , consuetudo, Obsequium, imp erium,

Auxilium et ap tituda, Et quicquid h is contrariuniBenignita s , vicinitas, Cum nuba, va ca cetera

J ucundz’

tas, aflinitas, Sub prim al stabunt regulfi.

70 sYNTAXIs MINOR .

‘

Pa trice s it idaneus, uti lis agris.E stfinitimus oratori p oeta .

Twrba gravis p aci p la cidceque inimica gm ti.Congruenter na ture: vivendum est.

Cuiturw patientem commua’nt aurem.

Quad a li i donut s ibi detra ln'

t,

Hoe mihi confi rma vit etp ersuas it.

Nabis spandetfortuna sa lutem.

Philosop hia medetur animis.T ibifa vemus .

Iruscor tibi.

Victrix causa dais p lacuit, sed vieta CM .

Pa rce p io generi .

Anguis Sullce appa ruit immolantz .

0 formose p uer, nimium ne crede colon.

Imperat a ut servit collecta p ecunia caique.

Placitone etiam p ugnabi s amori ?

Venus nup sit Vulcano.

Philosophia semper vaco.

Nulla fides regni soci is.

a.( ”ammunis, simiiis. proprius , par, atque alienate,Pluraque, nunc voluere Dativum

, uunc Genitivum m,

Media simillima veris sunt.

Deos esse similes tui p utas

Prop ria est nobis mentis agitatio.

Prop rium est oratoris ornatedicere.

Belecta atque juva , jubea, rego, leeda, guberna, A ccusativo contrareg ulam junguntur : ut,

Multos castra juvant.Tu regere imp erio p opulos , Humane, memento.

c . Tempero et moderar nunc Dativum nuuc Accusativum habent : ut

H ie moderatur equos qui nonmoderabitur irce.

2. Dativum fermé regunt Verba composita cum Adverbus bene, sans.male et cum Pra positionibus, praesertim his

Ad, ante, ab, Sub, sup er, 06,In, inter, de, Con, p ost, et p rca.

ut, Ceteris satisfacio semper mihi nunquam.

Sicilia quondam Italiw adhcesit.

G igantes bellum diis intulerunt.

Anatum ova gallznis scep é supponim

a . Multa ex h is variant constructionem : ut,

Heb eti i reliquos Gallos virtuteM att.

Inamore ha s inmnt vitia.

sI NTAXIS MINOR. 7 l

S. Dativus Agentis sequitur Verbalia in bilis , et Gerundivum indus ;i nterdum Participia perfecta ; raroVerba Pass iva : ut,

Multis ille bonisflebilis occidit.Bestut Chremes qui mihi exorandus est.M agnus civis obit etformidatus Ot/tani .Barbaras hic ego sum, quia nonintelligar ulli.

a. Verba et Partic ip ia P6ss iva plerumque habent Ablativum Agent“cum Praepositione a vel ab ut,

Laudatur ab his , culpatur ab illis.

3101’s Cra ssi est a mu/tis defleta .

ll. Dativus Propositi additur Verbo sum et multis aliis, vei pm Nom inativo vel pro A ccusativo : ut,

Exemplo estmagni for mica laboris .

Nucleum amis i reliquitp ignori p utamina

a . Swpé duplex adm ittitur Dativus : ut.

Emitia est avidum mare nantis.

IV. Genitivus Po ssessoris sequitur omnia fete Substantive,Verba sum, facio,fio, per ellipsinSubstantivi : ut,

Singulorum ap es sunt divitice civitatis.

Omnia , qua:mnlieris fuerunt, viri fi unt.Scip io H ispaniam Romance ditionis fecit.

1. Est Impersonale preeponitur Genitivo , si intellig itur

I'ndoles , ind icium, Munus aut oflicium.

ut, Cujusvis hominis est errare.

Imp robi hominis est mendacio fallere.E st adolescentis mtg

'

ores natu vereri.

2. Fit etiam ellipsis aliorum Nom inum ante Genitivum : ut,

Hectoris Androma che. ( supple uxor.)Deiphobe Cla uci . ( supple f lia . )Ventum erat a d Vestce . ( supple temp lumHujus video Byrrbiam. ( supple servum. )

3. Genitivus Personalis inPo sses sivo Pronom ine lateus recipit alterumG enitivum sibi concordantem : a t,

Respublica med unius op erd salva erat.

Nostras vidistifl entis acallas.

Genitivus Qualitatis sequitur Substantive : ut.

Ingenui vultfis puer ingenuique pudaris.

Qualitas etiam inAblativo ponitur : ut.

Senex p romissa barbc'

i, barrenti capiflo.

72 SYNTAXIS MINOR.

5. Vocabula Partitiva, Num eralia , Comparativa, et Superlativa m un!Gem tIvum , quocum genere conco rdant : ut,

Mah‘m harum a rborum med ips ius manu sunt sate .

Utroque vestrz’

lm delector

Sequimur te, sanots d eorum .

Sulla centum vig inti suarum amisit.

Major Aleronum .

fortissimi .IVemo morta lium omnibus horis sap it.

Minimé omniuml

6. H i Genitivi, gentium , terrarum, aluque, sequuntur Adverbia hue. ab,qua, ubi , sim ilia : ut,

M igrandum aliqut) terrarum arbitrar.

7. Quantitatem significantia Adverbia et Substantiva, item Neutra Ad

jectiva ac Pronom ina, G enitivum regunt : ut,

Satis eloquentice, sap ientice p a rum.

J ustitia nihil exp etit p rwm i i .

A liquid p ristini roboris conservat.

Quantum nummorum, tantumfidei.

8 . Genitivum segunt Verbalia inax, Particip ia qua dam adjectiveposits,etA djectiva significantia

Notitiam, curam, et cup iditate m, Et qua: contrario sensu stant

JVIemoriam , metum, crimen, p a Poetae m ulta alia dant

testatem,

ut, Temp us edax rerum.

Animus a lieni app etens, sui p rofusas.Nescia mens hom inum estfati.Omnes immemorem benefi ci i oderunt.

Fraterni sanguinis insons .

‘

Ira est imp otens sui .

0 seri studiorum .

O Verba quaedam accusandi , absolvendi, damnandi, manend i, I‘

egunt Genitivum rei : ut,

Ctmdemnamus harusp ices stultitice.

R es adversce admonentnos relig ionum.

nu. Memin’i , recordar, reminiscor, obliviscor, nunc Geniti 'mm regunt,nuncA ccusativum : ut,

.

'

ubet mortis te meminisse Deus .

Dulces marzens reminiscitur A rgos .

1 1 Mise'eor, miseresco, Genitivo junguntur : ut,

Nil nostrt miserere

SYNTAXIS MINOR . 73

V. Adjectiva Verba, et aliquando Substantiva, adm ittuntA blativum significantem causam , vel instrumentum,

vel modum ,vel materiam , vel respectum , vel limita

tionem qualemcunque : ut,

Coeptis Immap ibus efiera D ido.

Oderuntp eéEa re ma liformidine p aence.

H i jaculis , illi certant defendere saxis .

Injuria ‘fit duobus modi s, vi a utfrauds.

Animo constamus et corp ore.

Ennius ingenio maximus , a rte rudis .

Mardonius natiane M edus .

Nongrandis natu est, sed tamenJ am estate provad as.

l . F‘zmgor,frucr, utor, vescar, Ablativum reg unt ; patiar, Ablativum vel

Genitivum : ut,

Fungar vice cotis.

Czlm vi ctorid p osset uti, frui maluit.Numides ferind carne vescebantur.

Aura vi patitur.

Romani s ignorum p atiti sunt.

Adjectiva et Verba, quse ad cop iam egestatemve pertinent, Ablativumregunt ; multa etiam G enitivum : ut,

Amor etmelle etfelle estfecundissimus.Numquam animus motu vacuus est.

Turp e est difiiuere luxurid.

Va ca re culp é maximum est solatium.

D ives op um, d ives p iota i vestis et auri.

Mancip i is locup les eget ceris Capp adocum rear.

Hoe res vita me saturant.

Opus et usus Ablativum regunt : ut,

Ubi res adsunt, quid opus est verbis

Usus estfilio vig inti minis.

Adjectiva, dignus, indignus , p rceditus , fretus, contentus, Verbumd ignar, Ablativum regunt : ut,

B ignum Iaude virum Musa aetatmori .

Lentulus est s ingulari modestid p rceditus.

Haud equidem tali me d ignar honore.

5. Ablativus Pretu sequitur Verba et A djectiva significantia emptionem, venditionem, vel cestimationem ut,

Ego sp em pretia nonemo .

Plurimus aura ve’

nit honos.

Multaram sarvm ine victoria stetit.

Quad na nopus eat, m e carum eat.

74 SYNTAX IS MINOR.

a. Per Ellipsin usurpantur, om issavoce pretia, Ablativi, fi ll , pa rvo"

minimo, nimia, magno, plurimo, dupla, et d imidia ; pt,

Parvafames constat, magna fa stid ium.

b. [Estimatio rei plerurnque Genitivum habet, pre sertim ellipticos

illos, magni , pa rvi, minimi , pluris , atque pturimi ut,

Sap iens dolorem nihili facit.Voluptatem virtus minimi fa cit.Pluris est oeulatus testis anus qudm auriti decem.

e. TarnPretium quam E stimationem significant, pluris, minaris , tanti ,auanti , maximi : ut,

Emit hartos tanti quanti Pythius valuit.

6. Ablativus Difi'

erentiaa jung itur Adjectivis, Adverbns, et Verbis com

parative ct superlativae s ignificationis ut,

Sal multi s partibus major est qudm luna .

A Cynieis tunied distantia dogma ta .

a . Inprim is Ablativi ellipticx

Altero, hoe, ea, qua, D imidia, dupla, quanta , tantO,Nihtlo et nimio, Paullo, multa, aliquanto

ut, Ea gravzar est dolor, qua eulpa major.

Tanto pess imus omnium paeta ,

Quanta tu op timus omnium p atranus.

7 . Ablativus Comparationis regitur a Comparativis, sive Adjectivigsive Adverbiis : ut,

Vilius argentum est aura , virtutibus aurum.

Qudm eleganter omittitur postp lus , amp lia s, minus ut.

Plus quingentas calapfws infreg itmilz i .

Ablativum regunt her Przepositiones

A, ab, absque, caram, de, H is subter, sup er, addito .

Palam, clam, cum, ex, et e, Et in, sub, si fit static.

Sine, tenus , pro, et p raa

a . Praapositio inCompositions eundem nonnunquam casum regit,quexnet extra Compositionem regebat ut

Detruduntnaves scapula.

b. Vetba diseedendi , sep arandi, a reendi, removendi, et similiz , omisei

quoque Praepositione, regunt Ablativum : ut,

Codes coemptis saltibus et demo.

Pop ulus Athemens is Phaetonem putrid pepulit.

46 SYNTAXIS MINOR.

II. 1. Law s , in quo est aut fit aliquid, ponitur inAblativp , vel sinePreepos itione, vel longé frequentius cum Praepositione in: ut.

Ibamfarté Vta Sa erd.

InL emno uxarem dus it.

Opp idi nomen,inqua est aut fit aliquid, ponitur inAblativo , modo

sit vel tertiaa Declinationis, vel p luralis Num eri : ut,

A lexander Babylone mortuus est.

Philipp us Neapoli est, Lentulus Puteolis.T/lebis nutritus anA rg is.

3 Sed inGenitivo ponitur, si etDeclinationis est primes vel secundaet smgularis Numeri : ut,

Quid Roma:fa ciam mentiri nescio.

4. Loci nomena Prsepo sitione feré regitur postVerbum motfis ut,

Profectus est inGa lliam.

Ab Europ d p etis Asiam.

Opp idi nom en, ad quad itur, inAccusativo s ine Praepositione fete

ponitur : ut,

R egulus Carthag inem rediit.

Oppidi nom en, ex quo itur, in Ablativo sine Pra positione fore

ponitur : ut,

Demaratus fug it Corintho.

7 Sed et Oppida saspe cap iunt, et alia Nomina om ittunt Przepositionem

post Verbum m otfis ut,

A Brundisio nullafama venerat.

Pars Scythiam et rap idum Crete: veniemus Oaxen.

8 Humus, domus,’

et rus oppidorum constructionem im itantur : ut,

Cadmus sp arg it humi, morta lia semina , dentes .

Parvi suntforis arma , nisi est cons ilium domi .

Ite domum satures , venitH esp erus, ite cap ellce.

Video rare redeuntem senem.

III. I. SpatiurnDistantiae frequentius inAccusativo, interdum inAbla~

tivo ponitur : ut,

Aberam ab Amana iter unius d iei .

E sculap i i temp lum quinque m illibus p assuum ab Ep idauro

diStuC.

9 . Spatium Progressionis inA ccusativo poni tur : ut,

Millia tum p ransi tria rep imus.

SYNTAXIS MINOR.“l. 77

3. Spatium Dim ensionis frequentissime in A ccusativd unterdumA blativo

,interdum inG eni tivo ponitur : ut,

Brant muri Babylonis ducenos p edes alt:

Langum sesquip ede, latum p ede.

Areas lata s p edum denzimfa cita.

§9 6. E . I. l . L ibet, licet, liquet, et ple i aque Impersons lia, reguut Da

tivurn: ut,

Ne libeat tibi quad nonlieetSt iS inter se convenit urs is ,

2. P iget, p adet, pcenitet, teedet atque miseret, regunt A ccusativum Personaecum Genitivo Roi, vel cum Infini tiwo : ut,

Miseret te a liaram tui te nee m iseret, nee p adet.

file civitatis 7720 7 11777 piget ta detque .

Eos p artim scelerum . p artim ineptia rum p a'nitet.

Quem p cenitetp ecca sse, p a md est innocens.

3. Delectat, juvat, decet, dedecet. ap ortet, Accusativum cap iuut : ut,

Mejuvat inp rimé coluisse Helicana juventd.Gretarem ira sei m inim? deest.

L egem brevem esse ap artet.

Pertinet, attinet, Praapositionem ad cum A ccusativo sumunt : ut,

Ad rempublieam pertinet, me canservari.

Profundat, p erdat, p ereat, nihil ad me attiuet.

6 . Interest et refert Genitivum adm ittunt : ut,

Interest omnium rectéfa cere.

R éfert campas itionis, qua? quibus antep ana s.

6 . Cum h is Verbis junguntur, loco Pronom inum Personalium , Ah

lativi fem inini, med, tad, sud, nostrd, vestrd, subaudita vo ce

ut,

Et tud et med interest te valere.

Quid réfertmed, cui serviam

7 . Adduntur his Verbis Genitivx E stimationis, tanti, quanti, magni ,

parvi , p luris ut,

Utriusque nostrilm magni interest, ut te videam.

Hoe nonp luris réfert qudm si zmbrem incribrmngera s .

8. Verbs Neutra inPassivaVoce impersonaliter usurpantur pro quibuslibet personis : ut,

Ab omnibus reclamatum est. ( soil. omnes reelamdrunt. )Quid agitur statur ( scil. stetur a nabis, sive stamus.

78 SYNTAXIS MINOR.

II. 1. Active sententia feré omnis ita inPassivam converti po test, utNom inativus A ctive sententiae fiat in Passivit AblativusAgoutis.

(A. ) Si Active sententie Verbum Accusativum habet prop ioris Objecti,Verbum inPassivzi personale crit, A ccusativo Active inNominativum Passive transeunte : ut

Ac'r. Egregié consul rem gessit.Pass. Egregié ab consuls res gesta est.

(BA Sinm inus, Verbum Passives impersonale erit, et vei sine cm

stabit, vel eundem casum reget, quem inA ctivaregebat : ut,

ACT. Hostes eanstanter pugnabant7PA SS. Ab hastibus eonstanter pugnabatur.

Ac'r. Medicine nos indigemus .

Pa ss. Medicine a nobis indigetur.

2. Ubi nih il ambigui esse potest, supprim itur Ablativus Agentis postItnpersonalia Passive : ut,

Itur inantiquam siloam.

8. Hinc apparet, eosdem casus a Passivis Verbis regi, atque ab Activia.

pre terquitm unum Accusativum prop ioris Objecti.

4 Yapala, veneo, ez ulo, Iieeo, fio, cum alus quibusdam, vi Passiva construuntur : ut,

Testis ab reofustibus vapulavit.

Mala a eive spoliari, qudm ab haste venire.

Torqueor, infesta as vir ab haste eadat.

§97 F. I. Infinitivus cum Gerundus et Supinis Substantivum Verb!

eflicit.

l Infinitivus multis Verbis ac Particip us adjungitur et poeticé Ad

jectivis : ut,

Invidere noncadit insap ientem.

Videar p ios erra re per lueos .

Solent diu cog ita re qui magna volunt gerere.

E t eantare pares et responders parati.

2. Pm Accusativo Infinitivi ponitur G erundium in dorm post Prea

positiones : ut,

Breve tempus satis est longum ad bene vivendum.

Mares p uerorum se inter curlendum detegunt.

SYNTAXIS MINOR. 79

5. Pro Genitivo ponitur Gerundium in d i post Adjectiva et Substantiva : ut

Thucydides omnes dieendi artificia vincit.

4. Pro Dativo ponitur Gerundium in do post Adjectiva et Verbanonnulla : ut,

Crassus disserendo par esse nonpotuit.

5. Pro Ablativo ponitur Gerundium in do Causam , Instrumentum,

aut Modum significans, vel cum Pre pos itionibus ab, de. es .

in, cum ut,

Nihil agenda homines ma lefacere discant.J ovem a juvando naminamus.

6 . Gerundia Active significant: si verb Transitiva sunt, eorum constructio Passive repre sentari potest, imO frequentius repre

sentatur, per Particip ium Indus, quod inde Gerundivi nomenaccip it.

7 . Gerundiva constructio ejusmodi est, ut Substantivum in Gerunducasum trahatur, cum quo concordet Gerundivum ut,

E terré ignem elieimus ad calendas agros.

Occas io videba tur rerum novanda rum.

8 . Ad Necessitatem Passive significandam Gerundivum in NeutreGenere impersonaliter adh ibetur : ut,

Civium banis est a vobis eonsulendum.

Grandam est ut sit mens sana incorpore sano.

II. I. Supinum in um postponitur, ut Accusativus, Verbis matum significantibus : ut,

Spectatum veniunt, veniunt speetentur ut ip se .

Seitatum araeula Phe bi mittimus.

Sup inum in u postponitur, ut Ablativus Respectfis, tum multu

Adjectivis, tum Substantivis fas , nefas , opus : ut,

Nil dictufe dam visuque he e lim ina tangat,Intra que puer est.

Ecce (nefas visa ) serp ens a lta ribus exit.

I. Participia, Gerundia, et Sup inum inum, regunt casus snorum

Verborum ; ut,

Ausi omnes immune nefas , ausoque patiti.

5 98 . G . l . Neutra A d jectiva utriusque Numeri ponuntu‘

r interdumAdverbialiter, pre sertim apud poetas : ut,

Serviet e ternum qui parva neseiet uti .

Asper, acerba tuens, retro redit.

80 SYNTAXIS M INOR .

2 . Conjuncti ones Soc iativae et Dissociative sim iles Casus, Modos, et

Tem p o ra connectunt nt.

M iratur p ortas strep itumque et strata vtarum.

Vi rtus nee erip z nee surr ip i p otest.

Nisi alia constructionis ratio intercedat.

H . 1 NE, prohibitiva Conjunctio, Imperative vel Subjunctive Modo

jung itur : ut,

Ne qua meis esto dietls mora .

Ne eonferas culp am inme.

Subjunctivum exigunt lue Conjunctiones

Ut ( that) Dum

Te’

(lest , that— not) Modo (provided that)Qua ( inorder that) Dummodo

Quominus (but that) Tanqua

Quin (but that)Quum ( since)L icet

gyamvis (although)

( I w ish that)

3. Subjunctivum vel Indicativum pro re nata capiunt has Conjunctiones

QaumUbi (when)Ut

Dum

Dance

Quoad

Quoties (as o ftenas)Simul ae (as soonas)

4 . Indicativum plerumque capiunt he Conjunc tiones, nisi ratio lociSubjunctivum postulet

Quad (that, because ) Ut (from the tim e when)Quia (because) Dum

Quoniam (s ince) Donee (whilst, as long as)Quando (w hen, since ) QuoadSiquidem ( inasmuch as) Quanquam (although )

5. Quamvis cum Indicativo reperitur apud historicos et poetas : ut,

Quamvis ingenio nonvalet, a rte valet.

Relativum , qui, que , quad, Subjunctivum regit, ubi significat quum,

quamvis. ut, vel talis ut: ut,

Miseret tui me, qui huncfacias inimieum tibi .

L itera s mis i quibus etp la carem eum et monerem.

E st qui vinci p assit.

Quis estqui nanoderitpratervam pueritiam 9

Ante— 92mm(before that )Prius quam

Post— quam (after that)Si ( if )Nisi (unless)Etsi

E tiams i (although )

SYNT AXIS MINOR. 8 1

Pronorninibus et Particulis interroaandi, subordinate positis, Sub

junctivus additur ut,

lp se quis s it, utrum s it, annons it, ia quoque nesctt.

Talia sunt

Quis, quantusfi qualis, qui, quot, quatus , unde, ubi , quande,

Qudm, quamobrem, quare, cur, quomodo, nunc, né’

, at, an. utrum .

3. Relativum vel ConjunctIo , quum subordinatur Infinitive vel Sub

junctivo , Subjunctivum reg it : ut,

Ce sar ad me scrip s it, g ratissimum sibi esse quad quieverim.

Molior ut Ce sa r mihi eaneedat ut abs im, quum a liquid in senatecontra Gne um agatur.

9 . Conjunctio intelligitur aliquando : ut,

Philosop hie servias ap ertet. ( supple ut. )Que ramjustum sit neenep oema . ( supple utrumPa rtem ap ere intanta, sineret dolor, Icar e, haberes . ( supple si .Naturam exp ella s fared, tamenusque recm et. (s upple etsi .

FIRST

RULES OF CONSTRUING AND

FOR THE USE OF BEGINNERS.

99 . A . As every independent Sentence must have

I. A Verb ina Pr0per Mood, expressed or understom

II. A Subject in the Nominative Case, expressed or nuderstood ; w ith which the Verb agrees (see

So observe more particularly

(a ) A Substantive may have any of these Adjuncts :

( l ) Adjectives agreeing w ith it ;

(2 ) Substantives inappo sitionto it ;

(3 ) A Genitive governed by it ;

(4) A Prepositionand Case depending onit.

(b) AnA dj ective may have any of these Adjuncts( 1 ) AnAdverb qualifying it

( 2 ) Cases go ve rned by it ;( 3 ) A Prepositionand Case depending onit.

(c) A Verb may have any of these A djuncts

( I) AnAdverb qualifying it ;(2 ) Cases governed by it ;(3 ) Prepositions (w ith their Cases) depending onit ;

(4 ) AnInfinitive depending onit.

3. Therefore, inorder to construe a simple Sentence

I. Find its Verb, which must be in6 Proper Mood.

Obs . Ifno such Verb appear, e'

st or stint is p robably understood.

II. Find its Subject, which w ill be a Nom inative Case. ofthe sameNumber and Personas the Verb, answering the questionwho or what

84 FIRST RULE S OF CONSTRUING AND PARSING.

Ager m eus, myfi eld Agri mei, myfieldsAgri m ei, of myfi eld Agrorum m eorum , of my v

ielda

Agro m eo , to myfi eld Agris m eis, to myfieldsAgrum m eum , my fi eld A gros m eos , myfi elds

Ager m i, 0 myfi eld Agri m ei , 0 myfi eldsAgro m eo , by myfield Agris meis, by myfields

And inlike manner

Mensa m ea, my table. Opus m eum , my work, &c. &c.

Its Case Gender Number Nom.

AnA dj ective, Sing.-What declined like —What it

agrees With ?

Decline it, if required.

Its Person Tense Mood Voicea . A Verb ina Verb it comes from— K ind of VerbProperMood Conjugation— What Nom . it agrees

With ?

Conjugate it, if required, according to 44.

G ive th e Rule, if required, for i ts Perfect and Sup ine and theSyntax Rule for its construction.

Tense—Voice—Verb it comes from

6. AnInfinitive K ind ofVerb— Conjugation—Whatgoverned by

c . Gerund or

Supine,

Conjugate and g ive Rules for b. and c. as for a .

Verb it comes from,&c., 8m.

Case— Gender—Number— Nom . Sing.

d Participle-T ense— Voice—Verb it comes from—K ind of Verb— Conjugation— Whatit agrees w ith ?

Decline. Conjugate, and give Rules, as above, (2 ) (3) a.

What Antecedent?— How it agrees(4)nggzn Rew ith its Antecedent? -What Case?Why?

Obs . Personal Pronouns follow the rules of Substantives Pos

sessive those ofAdjectives : Demonstrative Pronouns maybe used e ither as Substantives or Adjectives.

5) Adverb, What word it qualifies ?

smsr RULES or CONSTRUING AND PAR SING. 85

(6) Preposition, What word it governsNote. Whenthe learner is somewhat advanced , he must also state, in

parsing , the derivationand compositionof w ords , the govern

m ent ofMoods, &c. &c.

EXAMPLE — It is required to construe and parse the words

Ad firmandum corpus multum conducit tempestiva animirem issio, quae negligi nonpotest impune.

1. These words containtwo connected simple sentences. or

one compound sentence.

( 1 ) Verb of first sentence is conducit (Th ird Pets. Sing A

(2 ) SubjectNom . of first sentence is rem issio.

( 8 ) Adjuncts to the Subject are,a . Agreeing Adjective,b. G enitive Case,

Adjuncts to the Verb are,

a . Adverb , multum .

b. Prepositionw ith Case, ad firmandum corpus

Verb of second sentence is potest.

SubjectNom in. of second sentence is quae.

Adjuncts to the Subject quae, none.

Adjuncts to the verb are,

a. Adverb , non.

b. Infinitive, negligi.c. Adverb, impune.

2. Construe the words inthis order

Tempestiva rem issio anim i, qua: nonpotest l negligiSeasonable relaxation of-mz

’

nd, which can-not bc-omitted

impune, conducit multum I ad firmandum corpus .

with-imp unity, conduces much to strengthening the. body

3. Parse thus, taking the words inorder of construing( L ) Tempestiva. Adjective. Nom . Fem . Sing . from tempestivus

like bonus. Agrees w ith rem issio by R ule

93. A . I.

(Q.) Rem issio. Substantive. Nom . Sing. Th ird Decl. Fem.

(onis ). Subject of the Verb conducit. Rule

for its G ender 7 8 . (a )

86 rmsr RULE S or CONSTRUING AND PARSING.

Animi.

Negligi.

Impune.

( 9 . Conducit.

( lo. ) Multum.

Ad.

Firrnandum.

Corpus.

Substantive. Gen. Sing . from animus (i ) mind.Second Decl. Masc. Governed by rem iss io byRule 93. B. 7 . Rule for Gender, 72 .

R elative Pronoun. Agrees w ith Antecedent rem iss io , being Fem . Sing . Th ird Pers. Rule.93. III. Nom inative to the Verb potest.

Adverb . Qualifies the Verb potest.

Verb . T hird Pers. Pres . Indic . A ct. from th e

Irregular Neuter Verb possum (potes, & c .

6 1. A grees w ith its Nom. quae by R ule

98 . II.

Verb . Pres . Infin. Pass. from the TransitiveVerb negligo ( is) , I-neglect. Third Conj . Is

governed by the Verb potest by Rule 97 . F.

I. l . Conjugate negligo , neglig is, neglexi , &c.

Rule for Preterperfect and Supine, 9 1. 4. N.

82 . (b) .

Adverb Qualifies the Verb negligi (or po

test) .

Verb . Third Pers. Pres. Indic. A ct. from the

Neuter Verb conduco ( is) , I-conduce. Third

Conj . Agrees w ith its Nom inative Case rem is

sio by Rule § 93. II. Conjugate conduco ,conducis , conduz i, See. Rule for Preterperfect

and Sup ine, 82 . (b) .

A dverb. Qualifies the Verb conducit.

Preposition. Governs the A ccus . Case corpus.

Partici ple . A cc. Neut. Sing . from firmandus,Part. Gerundive Pass. from the Transitive Verbfirmo (as ) ; I-strengthen First Conj . Agrees

w ith corpus by Rule §97 . I. 7 .

Substantive. A cc . Sing. from corpus (oris ) .Th ird Decl. Neut. Governed by ad, by Rule

§ 94. V. 8 . R ule for Gender, §75 .

Note. Each rule , w hen required, must be repeated at full : each Sub

stantive, w hen required, he declined w ith mens ; and each

Verb be conjugated according to §44.

SYNTAXIS, SIVE SENTENTIARUM

CONSTRUCTIO.

PAR S I.

DE SIMPLICI SENTENTIA.

PREFATOR Y EXCUR SION.

SYNTA X teaches the correct arrangem ent of w ords in sentences.

'

1 he

s im plest sentence is the Propositionor Enuntiationof a single though t

as . homo est mortalia, m an is m ortal. The simplest form of Sentence

has three members :

1 . Subjectum, the Subject ; that is, the person, thing , or notionconcerning w hich som eth ing is predicated, or declared.

2 . Prced icatum,the Predicate ; thatw h ich is predicated (p rced icatur ).

or declared, concerning the Subject.8 . Copula , or the L ink, w h ich show s the connection betw een the

Subject and its Predicate, and so constructs the sentence.

( 1) The Subject must be a Substantive, or that w h ich

possesses the force of a Substantive : as homo , m an;ego, I Gallus, a Gaul ; errare, to err ; tu, thou

(2 ) The Predicate, w hen distinct from the Copula, must

be a Substantive, A djective, Participle , or A djectivalPronoun; as, anima l, an anim al ; morta lis, m ortal ;victus , conquered ; noster, ours : or a Prep os itionw ithits case (equivalent to a noun) ; as s ine vitiis

, pro

consule.

(3) The Copula, whendistinct from the Predicate, is generallysome finite form of th e Verb of being , sum.

Examples of Simple Sentences inwh ich the three members are distinct

SUBJ ECT .

l . Homines

Men0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ‘ C . ’

m ortal

8 8 SYNTAXIS, srvn

SUBJ ECT . PR EDICATE.

5 . Tu consuls.Thou art

But, ingeneral, the Predicate and Copula are blended together in onefini te Predicative Verb, w hich is thencalled the Predicate : as,

SUBJ ECT . PBl DICATE .

I learn(am learning ) .

breathe (are breathing ) .

Here, strictly speaking , the crude Forms of the Verbs (disc sp ira are

the Predicates, and the Endings -0, m t) , are the Copulas . And,w henthe Subject is understood from the Ending , a single Verb m ay he a

complete sentence. Thus, the famous defispatch of Caesar, Veni , vidi ,vici ( I cam e, I saw , I conquered) , contains three distinct sentences,each consisting of one w ord only.

Obs . 1. WhenanAdjective qualifies a Substantive w ithout be ing. joinedto it by a Copula, it is said (attribui , attributum esse) to be anA ttributive or Epithet. Thus, in the sentence, Vir bonuslaudatur (a good m anis praised) , bonus is anEp ithet ; but inVir estbonus (the m anis good) , bonus is the Predicate.

Obs . 2 . The Infinitive , Participles , Gerunds, and Sup ines , are called

Verbum Infinitum all the other form s of the Verb , any of

w h ich can m ake a complete sentence , are called Verbum

Finitum.

Obs . 3 . Objectum , the Object, is that person or thing upon wh ich an

action is directed : as, Parentes amant liberos , w here Iiberos is

the Object. Sometim es there are tw o Objects, a nearer and arem oter : as, Pater librumfi lio da t w here librum is the nearerObject, filio the remoter.

Obs . 4. Cop ulative Verbs are those which coup le a Subject and a Nom inal

Predicate. Of these Verbs sum is the ch ief but others also

have a Copulative use, as forem , fio, existo, e'

vado, maneo, audio,nascor, videor and Passive Verbs of making , naming , declar

ing , choos ing , thinking , finding , go. as efiicior, appellor, moor,

nuncup or, dicor, feror, declaror, crear, designof , eligor, inscribor,es istimor, p utor, credor, agnoscor, habeor, invenior, rep erior, go.

DE CONCORDANTIIS.

CONCORDANTIA PRIMA .

A djectivi cum Substantivo.

R egula Genera lis.- A djectiva, Participia, et Prono

mina, sive attributa sive praed1cata, cum Substan

tivis suis genere, numero, et casu concordant : ut,

SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 89

Dance erisfelix, multos numerabis am icos

Nullus ad amissas ibit amicus op es. OVIDIUS.

l . Substantivum per ellipsinintelligitur : ut,Laborem p leriquefug iunt. (supple homines .

— CICERO .

Cornice a la va canit, oorvus a dextra . (supple manu.

2 . Nentra Adjectiva Substantivorum vice fungunturut,

Omnium rerum mors est extremum . CIC.

Honestum etutile pugnare aliquando videatur. Clo.

Verecunda lamamas seria mensa . PER SIUS.

CONCORDANTIA SEGUNDA .

Verbi cum Nominativo Suhjecti.

103. R . G.-Verbum finitum concordat cum Nominativo

numero et persona ut,

Omnia vitia contra naturam p ugnant.— SENECA.

Sera nimis vita est crastina . MARTIALIS.

Obs . Aliquando Infinitivus, vel continuata Locutio, vel Adver~

bium cum Genitivo, pro Nommat1vo ponitur :ut,Nonestmentiri meum.

— TERENT 1US.

Iacertam estguam longa nostrum cujusque vita futura sit. “ Clo.

Parum in60 putabatur esse animi . (310 .

A . DE ELLIPSI NOM INATIVI.

Obs . l . Nom inativus Pronom inum rarc‘

) eXprim itur : ut,

Nitimur invetitum semp er cup imusque neg ata . Ov

Obs . ) Nisi distinctioni vel emphasi inserviat : ut,

Ego reges gjeci . vos tyrannos introducitis . —Crc

Obs . 2 . Dicendi, narrandi, et app ellandi Verba tertiae personae pluralis Nom 1nat1vum homines seepe habentintellectum : ut,

Quad a inat, auribus teneo lup um. TER .

Obs . 3. Impersonalia Nom inativum non habent expres

sum: ut,

Ta det ipsum vehementerque pani/et. CIC.

( Obs Multa vero , quae Impersonalia vocantur, Nom inati vumaliquem habent intellectum : ut,

J am advesperasrit. ( supple dies . ) CIC.

90 SYNTAXIS,srvn

B. DE ELLIPSI VE RBI.

Obs . 1. Personae praasentisVerbi sum seepeintelliguntur :ut,Nihil banum nisi quad hanestum . (supple est.) Clo .

Obs . 2 . Infinitivus interdum Nom inativo postponitur ut,

Tum p ius E neas humeris absaindere vestem .— V1R G .

Obs. ) Plerumque autem Infinitivus A ccusativo postponitur,praecedente Verbo finito : ut,

Tradunt Homerum crecumf uisse. Clc .

CONCORDANTIA TERTIA .

R elativi cum Antecedente.

R . G . Relativum cum Antecedente concordat

genere, numero, et persona casu autem construitur cum sua sententia ut,

Ea estjuaundissima amicitia, quam sim ilituda

marum canjugavit. 010 .

1. Si Sententia pro Antecedente ponitur, R elativum est

inneutro genere :ut,

In temp are ad eam veni, quad rerum omnium est

p rimum . TER .

2 . Interdum Antecedens in possessivo Pronom ine ih

cluditur ut,

Omnes laudarefartunas measQui natum haberem tali ing enio prwditum . (scilicet,fortunas mei qui. TER .

S 107 . Nata — R elativum , Qui, quce, quad, plerumque consideraridebet tanquam positum inter duos casus unius Substantiv i, sive expresses sive suppresses : cum antecedentsconveniet in genere et numero : cum sequente etiam incasu, sicut Adjectivum cum Substantive .

Obs . l . Ambo Casus interdum exprimuntur : ut,

E rant itinera duo, quibus itineribus ez irc possent. Cass“ ;

Obs . 2 . Plerumque supprim itur Casus posterior : ut,

Animam rege, qui, nisi paret,Imp erat. (scilicet qui animus . ) HORA

'X‘I J S.

am. 3. Interdum p rior : ut,

Sic tibi dentnymp hce qua levet unda s itim (scil. madam qua

unn’n. O v.

92. SYNTAXIS, SIVE

( Obs . ) Verbum haud ratt‘

) cum proximo Substantivo concordat : ut.

Relig io etfides anteponatur am icitice. C10 .

Convicta est Messa lina et Silius .— TA CITUS.

C. DE CONSTRUCT IONE VERBORUM

COPULAT IVORUM .

R . G .— Verba Copulativa, sive finiti modi, sive 1nfiniti,

eundem habent utrinque casum ut,

Si sp es est exp ectatio bani, mali exp ectati

neoesse estmetum.—CIC .

Syllaba langa brevi subjecta vacatur Iambus .—HOR

R eg ius agnascar p er rata signa puer .— Ov.

Vabis licet esse beatis .— HOR .

Obs. 1 . Verbum , inter duo s Nom inativos positum , interdumcum posteriore solo concordat ut,

Amantium irce amaris integratia est. TE R .

Nanomnis error stultitia est dicenda . C10 .

Obs . 2 . Relativum , inter duo Substantiva ejusdem rei collocatumcum posteriore solo smpé concordat : ut,

Animal p lenum rationis , quem vacamus hominem . CIC.

Thebce, quad Bwotice cap ut est. LIV.

D. DE APPOSIT IONE .

R . G . Substantivo, Pronomini, et interdum Sententia ,

apponi potestSubstantivum ejusdem rei ineodem casu : ut,

Efi'

adiuntur ap es, irritamentaNos causales desumus .

— CIC .

Cag itet aratarem institui , rem arduam. CIC .

Cum duo Substantiva diversarum rerum concurrunt, alteruminGenitivo ponitur : ut,

R ecubans sub tegminefag i . — V1R G .

DE RECTIONE CA SUUM.

ACCUSATIVUS.

g 114. A ccusativus est casus prOpioris Objecti .

R . G . I.— Verba Transitiva reguntA ccusativum propioris

Objecti : ut,Sp erne volup tates . HOR .

Imp rimis aenera re Deum .—V1B.G .

Percantatarem fug ita. HOB.

sENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIo. 93

Obs . 1. Verba quaedam Neutra et Passiva Accusativ um admittunt suae operationis ut,

Duram servit servitutem.— PLAUTUS.

Claudius a leam lasit.— SUET0N1US.

5 115 . Obs . 2 . Verba Transitiva, quae inVoce Passiva Copulativefiunt, duplicem habent A ccusativum

, unum Objectivum , alterum Prmdicativum : ut,

Ci aeranem apulus convulem dealaravit.— Clc .

Hannibal hilippum hostem reddiditR omanis.— NRPos .

5 1 16. Obs 3. Verba quaedam ragandi et docendi duplicem habentA ccusativum, unum personae, alterum verb rei ut,

Pacem te p oscimus amnes .— V1RG .

Quid nunc te, asina litterasdaceam .9— CIC.

Et interdum celo ut

E a ne me celet consuej'

ecifi lium. TER .

( Obs . ) Eadem verba inPassivaVoce retinent A ccusativum rei : ut,

Is pr imus rogatus est sententiam . LIV.

Motus doceri gaudet Ianicas .— H 0 R .

5 117 . Obs. 4. A ccusativuso

R espectfis Graeco more subj1citur tum

Verbis Neutr1s et Passivis tum A djectivi s : ut,M i catauribus ettremitartus .

— VIRG .

Infioitur teneras tata rubore genas .— TIBULLUS.

Germanarumfamintanudce sunt brachia ac lacertas .— TAC.

118 . R . G . II.— A ccusativum regunt hee Praepositiones

Ante, apud, ad, adversus , Prap e, p rop ter, p er, secundum,

Circum, circa , citra , cis, Sup ra, versus , ultra , transContra , inter, erg a , extra, His, sup er, subter, addito,Infra , intra ,juxta , ab, Et in, sub, si fit motio.

Panes , pone, p ost, etp rteter,

119 . R . G .- Vocativus

,A ppellati Casus, regitur ab Inter

jectione, sive expres sa, sive intellecta: ut,

0 Salp ulcher, O laudande.— HOR .

A lma Sal. HOR .

Fili vel afili.—'

TER .

Not. Interjectiones enet ecce regunt A ccusativum et Nominativum a, ah, heu, hem, p roh, A ccusativum , Nom1nat1vum, et

Vocativum : ut,

Enmiseram hominem CIC.

E cce nova turba atque rixa . Clo.

Heu miserande puer-VIRG .

Heu vanitas humana . PLINIUS.

Prah Deum atque hominumfidem — Cxc .

94 SYNTAXIS, SIVE

Obs. Dativum regunt hei et are ut,

Hei misera mihi T en.

Vie tibi, caus idice l— MAn'r.

DATIVUS.

120. Dativus est Casus remotioris Objecti. InterdumAgentem ,

interdum Propositum Significut.

A . DATIVUS OBJ ECTI.

R . G . I.- Omnia fere A djecti va etVerba, item A dverbia

et Substantive, regunt Dativum remotioris Objecti,cujus causa est aut fit aliquid : ut,

lVansalum nobis div ites esse vo lumus . CIC.

M ihi istic nee seritur neo metitur. PLAUT .

Numa virg inas Vesta? leg it — LIV.

Urbi p ater est urbique mar itas .—LUCANUS.

Tibi luditur. PERS

Obs . 1 . Ita sum possess we significans Dativum possidentishabet: ut,

E stmihi namque domi pater, est iiy'

usta naverca . VIR G .

Obs . 2 . Dativus Pronominis abundat eleganter ut,

Quid mihi Celsus ag it? HOR .

121. R . G . II . Dativum regunt plurima A djectiva,A dverbia, et Verba, interdum etiam Substantiva, a

quibus indi catur

Cammadum, communicatia, Traditio, venia, demonstratia,Comp aratia, consecratia, Pramissio

,fide s, etnarratioCang ruentia , consuetuda, Obsequium,

imperium,

Auxilium et ap tituda, Et quicquid his contrariam ;Benignitas , vim

'

nitas , Cum nuba, vaco : cetera

l uit unquam sic imp ar s ibi.— HOR .

E stfinitimus oratari

lp aeta .

— CIC.

Turba gravis p aci p acidwque inim ica quieti . -LUCAN.

Hom inifidelissimi sunt equus et canis .— PLIN.

Omnibus supp lex. CIC.

96 SYNTAXIs, SIVE

H i inter se wquales etp ares sunt. Clc .

Haze sunt locup letibus cum plebe communia . Cw ,

Homo sum humani nihil a me alienam p uto. T ER:Homini cum Deo s imilitudo est. Crc .

Senbnes cum Carnutibus cons ilia cammunicavere.

5 123. Obs . 2. Ex Adjectivis quae affectionem anim i denotant,multa capiunt Praepositiones in, erga, adversus,cum Accusativo : ut,

Acer inhostem. Hon.

Benignus erg a tafui . —PLAUT .

Obs . 3. Natus , ap tus, utilis, cum aliis Ad

gectivis cammadi et

cong ruentia ,A ccusativo seep junguntur cum

Praeposmone ad . ut,

Ad laadam et ad deans nati sumus . CIC .

Thracibus p ramptus estad mortem animus . TAG .

5 124. Obs . 4. Belecta atquejuva,jubao, rag a, la da, guberna, ct aliaquaedam Verba, A ccusativo contra regulam jun

guntur :~ut,

bfultas castra juvant. Hon.

Tureg ere imp eriap apulas ,R amane,memento.—VIRG .

Obs . 5. Temp era et moderar nunc Dativum nunc A ccusativum habent : ut,

Privignis mulier temp era i innocens. Hon.

Temperatorafranis . HOR .

Hie maderatur eguas qui nanmaderabitur irre .— HOR .

125. R.G . III.— Dativum ferme regunt Verba com

posita cum A dverbiis bane, satis, ma le ; et cum

Praepositionibus, praesertim his

Ad,ante, ab, Sub, sup er, ab,

In, inter, de, Con, p ast, at p ra .

(l ) Verba Transitiva : ut,Gigantes bellum (h i s intulerunt. —CIC.

Andtum ova ga llinis scap e supp animus . CIO.

Deus animam p rwfecit carp ori.— CIC.

(2) Verba Intransitiva : ut,Ceteris satisp

‘a c ia semp er ; m ihi nunquam .

—Cm.

Sicilia quondam Ita lim adhwsit.— J USTINUS.

Vir mihi semp er d best.— OV.

Impendent haminibvs va ria genera martis.- CIC.

Squamis interm ica t aurum . CLAUDIANUS.

Lucuma sup erfuit p a tr i. LIV.

Vitia nobis sub v irtutum nomine obrcpunt. SEN

SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 9 7

Obs . Multa ex his variant constructionem ut,

Helvetii reliquos Gallas virtute p rcecedunt. CmInamare haze insunt vitia . TER .

B. DATIVUS AGENTIS.

126 . R . G .— Dativus A gentis sequitur Verbalia inbilis ,

et Gerundivum in(dus ; t interdum Participia per

fecta ; rarb Verba Passiva r ut,

Multis ille banisfl ebilis occ idit. —HOR .

R estat Chremes qui mihi exarandus est. TER .

M agnus civis obit etfarmidatus Othani . J Uv .

Ba rbarus hie ego sum, quia nan intelligar ulli

Ov.

Obs . Verba et Participia Passiva plerumque habent Ablativum Agentis cum Praepositione a vel ab ut,

Laudatur ab his, culpatur ab illis . Hon.

M ars Crassi esta multis defleta . 010 .

C. DATIVUS PROPOSITI.

127. R . G .— Dativus Propositi additur Verba sum et

multis aliis,vel pro Nom inativo vel pro A ccusa

tivo ut,

Exemp la est magniformica laboris . HOR .

Nucleum amis i ; reliquit p ignori p utam ina .

— PLAUT .

Obs. Swpeetiam duplex admittiturDativus, alter Objecti, alterautem Prepositi ut,

E z itia est avidum mare nouns — Hon.

0

Quad aliis vitia vertis , tibi laudi na dawns— SEN

GENITIVUS.

Genitivus vel Subjectivus est, vel Objectrvus.’

A . Subjectivus : ut,Crassi defensia. (scil. oratio qud Crassus defendzt.)

B. Objectivus : ut,Defensza Gabinn. (scil. oratia qud defensas est Gw

binius .)

98 SYNTAXIS. SIVE

Interdum uterque Genitivus ab eodem Substantivo

pendet : ut,R ep entina erat Crass i defensio Gabina . (scil. or atioqud Crassus Gabinium defendit.) C10 .

Sic metus hostium, amar Dei, et similia, duplici sensu

dici possunt.

129 . A . GENITIVUS SUBJ ECTIVUS est in primis Auctoriset Possessoris ; item Qualitatis, et Distributionis.

R . G. I. Genitivus Auctoris et Possessoris sequitur omniafere Substantiva, neenanVerba sum,fa cia,fio, perellipsinSubstantivi : ut,

Polycleti signa p lanep erfecta sunt. CIC.

Singulorum ap es sunt divitiw c ivitatis. C10 .

Omnia , quce mulierisfuerunt, virifiunt. C10 .

Sc ip io H isp aniam R omance ditionisfecit. -L1V.

Q180. Obs. 1. E st Impersonale praeponitur Genitivo, si intelligitur

Indoles, indiaium,Munus aut ofi oinm .

ut, Cig'

usvis hominis est errare. Clo.

Imp robi hominis estmendaoiofallere.—CIC.

IIonoris amplissimi estmiseras defendere. CIc .

E stadolescentis majores natu vereri. C10 .

068 . 2 . Fit etiam ellipsis aliorum Nom inum ante Genitio

vum : ut,

Hectoris Andromache. (supple ua'

ar .) VIRG .

Deiphobe G lauc i . ( supplefilia .) VIR G .

Ventum erat ad Vestce. (supple temp lum .) Hon.

Hajns video Byrrhiam . (supple servum .) TER .

5 131. Obs . 3. Genitivi mei, tui, sui, nostri , vestri, objective tantumusurpantur : subjectweponuntur Possessw a meus,luvs , suus , noster, vester ut,

Si tibi aura mei, s ittibi aura tui . Ov .

Quonam nostri tibi aura recessit STAT .

Venatum puer ire p arat, mea maxima aura . VIRG.

Nicias vehementer tud sui memorid delectatur — CIC.

Obs. Genitivus Personalis in Possessivo inclusus recipit

alterum G enitivum sibi concordantem vel appo

situm : ut,

R espublica med unius,

op erd salva erat. CIC.

Meum solius peccatum corrig i nonpotest. Clc.

Aoesfaztus adultos sure ip sorumfiducicepermittunt. QUIN'I'.

A’

bsrros vidisti flentis ocellos . O'

v.

Stad ium tuum adolescentis p ersp exi CIC.

( Obs . Nastri , vestri, 0 . 1j :ct1ve, nostriim,r estraint, partitina

ponuntur.

100 sm s, em

5 134. Obs . 1.—Distributionem etiam efficiuntPm poeitiones er , in,

inter, ante, de ut,

Nihil ea: his , qua? videmus , manet.— SEN.

Thales sap ientissima s insep temfuit. CIC.

Inter Scythiae amnes amcenissimas Borystkenes.-MELA .

Ante omnes Turnus pulcherrimus .—VIRG .

Una de multisfuit in arentemSp lendidé mendaz . OR .

135. Obs . 2 .— Hi Genitivi, g entium, terrarum, aluque, sequuntur

Adverbia localia, hue, eo, qub, ubi, similia : ut,

M grandum aliqub terraram arbitror .— CIC .

Vir bonus , ubicumque oritg entium, a nobis dilig etur .—Clc.

Perseus p erfug ium sibi nusquam g entium esse ait. - L1v .

Haccine rerum venimus f— PER S.

136 . R . G. IV. Substantive, A dverbia, item NeutraA djectiva et Pronom ina, Quantitatem significantia,regunt Genitivum rei demensae ut,

J ustitia nihil exp etitp rwma .— CIC.

Satis eloquentice, sap ientiw p a rum . SALL .

A liquid p ristini robor is conserva t. -CIC.

Dim idiumfacti qui bene coep it babet.— HOR.

Quantum nummorum,tantumfidei.— J UV.

g 137. B. R . G . I. GENITIVUM OBJ ECT lVUM reguntmultaSubstantive, inquibus transitiva quaedam vis est ut

Insitus estmenti cognitionis amar. CIC.

Obs . Hie Genitivus aliquando Praapositionis cum casu vicem

occupat : ut,

Bellam Helvetiorum. (scil. cum Helvetns .) Cms.

138 . R . G . II. Genitivum Objectivam reguntVerbalia inace

, Participia. quaedam adjectivé posita, etA djectivasignificantia

t itiam,ca ram, et oup idita tem, Et quae contrario sensu

Memor iam,metam ,

crimen, p o stant ;

testatem, Poetae multa alia dant

ut, Temp us edaa: rerum .- CV.

Animus a lieni app etens, sui p rofusas .— SALL.

Nescia mens liominum estfa ti.— VIRG .

Omnes immemorem benefioii oderunt. CIC.

Ira est imp otens sui — SEN

SENTENTIA RUM CONSTRUCTIO. 101

Fraterm sanguinis insons . OV.

0 sort studiorum . HOR.

139 . R . G. III .—Verba quaedam a ccusandi, convincendi,

absolvendi, damnandi, regunt, cum A ccusativo per

sonae, Genitivum rei ut,

Cicero Verrem avaritioe a rguit. CIC.

Condemnamas ha rusp ices stultitice. 010 .

Ne quem innocentem cap itis a rcessas . CIC.

Obs . 1. Pro hoe Genitivo ponitur Preepositio, praesertim de,

cum suo casu ut,

A ccusatur inter sicarios etde veneficns . CIC .

Obs . 2 . Sine Praepositione usurpantur hi Ablativi, crimine,leg e, scelere, cap ite, et alii nonnulli : ut,

Tbemistocles criminep roditionis absens damnatus est.— NEP

Leg ibus ambitiis interrogatus p oenas dedit. CIC

Faluiam cap ite anquirendam subclamant. LIV.

Obs . 3. Sim iliter Verba monendi, cum A ccusativo persona ,regunt Genitivum rei : ut,

R es adverse admonent nos relig ionum. LIV.

Obs . ) Vel Ablativum cum Praepositione de ut,

Terentiam de testamenfo nwnea tis . CU“

.

110. R . G. IV - Memini, recordar, reminiscor ,obliviscor,

nunc Genitivum regunt, nunc A ccusativum ut,

J abet mortis te meminisse Deus . MAR T .

Dulces moriens reminiscita r A rgos .— VIRG .

141. R . G . V. M isereor, misereseo, Genitive junguntur ;m iseror

,comm iseror, A ccusativo ut,

Nil nostri m iserere.

’ VIRG .

A rcadii, quwso, m iseresc ite reg is . VIRG .

Ages ilaa s comm isera tus est fortunam Gra cie .

_ NEFO

5 142 . Not. 1. —Genitivus interdum ponitur postVerba desinendi , patiendi,regnand i ut,

Desine mollium tandem querelaram. H on.

R omani s ignorum et a rmorum p atiti sunt. SALL.

Daunus agrestium regnavitp op uloram.—H oa .

Not. —Ra riores sunt G enitivi Causae, R espectfis, Prop inationis : ut,

Laudabat leti juvenem. SIL.

Animi pendeo. CIc.

Da noctis media (supple poculum).—HOR.

r02 SYNTAXIS, SIVE

ABLATIVUS.

143. Ablativus estCasus qui circumstantia actionis definit.

R . G. I.— A djectiva, Verba, etaliquando Substantiva, adm ittunt A blativum significantem rei aut actionis cau

sam , vel instrumentum , vel modum,vel materiam ,

vel limitationem qualemcunque.

144. A . A BLATIVUS CAUSE sequitur Adjectiva, Verba, et

praesertim Participia ut,

— VIRG .

Oderantp eeca r HOR .

Animus p ravis cup idinibus cap tas.—SALL.

145. B. A BLATIVUS INSTRUMENTI sequiturVerba ut,

Dente lup us , cornu tauras p etit. HOR.

H ijaculis , illi certant defendere saxis .— VIP.G.

146 . C. A BLATIVUS MODI plerumque sequitur Verba ut,

Injuriafi t duobus modis, vi aa tfraude.-CIC.

Obs. Perseepe capit Preepositionem cum ut,

M agné cum curd atque dilig entic’

i scrip sit. CICCum venia

‘

facito, quisguis es, ista legas. Ov

147. D. (a i A BLATIVUSMA TERUE sequiturVerba construendi, consistendi, et sim ilia ut, ,

Animo constamus et corp ore. CIC.

Obs . Vel cum Praepositione ex ut,

Beata vita constat ex rectis actionibus . SEN.

(b) Fungor, fruor, utor,vescor, p atiar, Ablativum

regunt ut,

Fungar vice cotis . HOR.

Gum victorilz posset uti,frui ma luit. FLORUS.

Numidw ferinli carne vescebantur. SALL .

Auro vi p atitur. VIRG .

Obs. Haec Verba antiquitfis A ccusativum habebant: ut,Functus est ofi cium boni viri . Tan.

148. (c.) Adjectiva et Verba, quw ad cop iam egestatemvu

pertinent, A blativum regunt ; multa etiam Ge

nitivum : ut,

SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 105

Pygma lion, scelere ante a lias immamor omnes.’

V130 .

Crux prceter ceteras altior. SUE'I‘.

154. R . G . II. Ablativum regunt has Praepositiones

A ,ab

,absque, coram, de, His subter, sup er, addito,

Pa lam,clam

, cumgex, ete, Et in, sub, si fit statio.

Sine, tenus, p ro, et p rce :

Obs. 1. Praepositio inCompositione eundem nonnunquam Casum regit, quem et extra Compositionem regebat : ut,

Detrudantnaves scapula.- VIBG .

Te nunc alloquor, Africans . CIc .

Obs . 2 . Eleganter iteratur eadem Praepositio ut,

E corp ora exceditanimus . CIc .

Obs. ) Vel importatur nova : ut,

Alta deflux it ab e there tubes. LUCAN.

Obs 3. Verba discedendi, sep arandi, arcendi, removendi, et similia,om issaquoque Praepositione, reguntAblativum : ut,

Cedes coemptis saltibus etdomo . Hon.

Populus Atheniens is Phacionem p atria'

pepulit.—NEP.

( Obs . ) Hue refer Ablativum postVerba et Participia Originis : ut,

Atreus Tantalo p rognatus , Pelope natus. CIC.

Sate sanguine d ivum.—VIRG.

Obs . 4. Tenus vel Genitiuumpluralem vel Ablativum regit, et

post suum Casum ponitur : ut,

Crarum tenus a menta p alearia p endent. VIRG .

Antiochus Tauro tenus regnarejussus est. CIC .

Obs . 5 . Cam ita subjungitur casibus Pronominum Personalium,

et plerumque Relativi, ut ex duobus vocibus una fiatut, mecum, tecum

, secam, nobiscum,vobiscum, quicum

pro quocam, quibuscum.

A. DE ABLATIVO ABSOLUTO.

155. R . G . Substantivum et Participium conjunctim ponunturinAblativo, quem Absolutum voeant : ut,R eg ibus exactis causales creati sunt. —LIv.

Cazsare ventura, Phosp hore, redde diam — MART .

Pereunte obseqaio imp erium etiam intercidit. -TAC.

Obs. 1. Absoluteetiam ponitur Substantivum cum Substantivo vel Ad

jectlvo , ubi intellig itur Participium ewistendi ut,

Nil desp erandum est, Teucro duce et ausp ice Teucro. Hon.J amgue cinis, vi

-vis fratribus, Hector erat. C v.

106 SYNTAX 1s, SIVE

Obs . 2 . Aliquando cum Ablativo Participnabsoluteponi tur continuataLocutio pro Ablativo Substantivi : ut,

Excep to qudd nons imul esses, cetera la tus . Hon.

DE CONSTRUCTIONE TEMPORIS.

156 . R . G . I.— Definitio Temporis in Ablativo ponitur, si

rogatur quando vel intra quantum temp us ut,

H iama omnza bella conquiescunt: CIC .

Quicquid est, biduo sciemus . CIC .

Obs. I. Indefiniendo Tem pore multus est Praepositionum usus : ut,

Sol binas ins ingulis annis reversiones facit. 010.

De die. ( id est. antefinem diei . ) H OR .

De nocte. ( id est, antefinem noctis. ) 310 3 .

De multa nocte. ( id est, ma lto antefinem noctis . ) Clc.

Sub vesp erum. ( id est, app rop inquante vespero. )— Cfi .s .

D iem ex die eJ'

p ecto .— CIC.

Obs. 2 . Quanta tempore abbina, anté, vel pdst, interdum per Ablati

vum , interdum per A ccusativum dicitur : ut,

Comitia jam abbino trig inta diabas erant habita . Clc .

Hocfa ctum estfermé abbina biennium .- PLAUT .

R G . II. Duratio temporis, ubi rogatur quamdiu, frequentlusinA ccusativo ponitur, rarius inAblativo ut,

Pericles quadrag inta annas p rwfa itAthenis . CIc .

Imp erium A ssgrii mille trecentis annis tenaere. J usr .

DE CONSTRUCTIONIBUS LOCI ET SPATII.

157. A . R . G . I.— Locus, inquo est aut fit aliquid, ponitur in

Ablativo, vel sine Praepositione, vel longé frequentifis cumPraepositione in ut,

Ibamforte Via Sacré.—110 11 .

InLemno uxorem ducit.— TER .

Obs. 1. Oppidi nomen, inquo est aut fit aliquid, ponitur inAblativo,modd sit vel tertiae Dec linationis, vel pluralis Numeri : ut.

A lexander Babylone mortuus est. CIC.

Plcilippus Neap oli est, Lentulus Pateolis. CIC.

Obs. 22. Sed inG enitivo p onitur, si et Declinationis est primae vel

secundae, et singularis Numeri : ut,

Quid Roma:fa ciam mentiri nescio.- J UV.

ls habitat Mileti.— T z a.

108 SYNTAXIS, sn'e

R . G . II. Pig at,Ipua

’et, p anitet, tcedet atque ~

miseret, reguntA ccusativum ersonm, cum Genitivo R el, vel eum Infinitivo : ut,Ell iseret te aliaram tui te nec miseret, nec p adet. —PLAUTM e civitatis morum p ig et tcedetqae. SALL .

E os p artim scelerum, p artim inep tiarum p amitet. CIC.

Quem p amitetp eccasse, p cené est innocens . SEN.

R . G . III.—Delectat,juvat, decet, dedecet, impersonaliter posita,

A ccusativum cum Infinitivo postulant ut,

Oratorem irasci minime‘

decet. CIc .

M ejuvatinp rima coluisseH eliconajuventd.— PROP .

G . IV. Op ortetvel Accusativum cum Infinitivo regit, velNominativum cum Subjunctivo, Conjunctione at omissa:ut,

Leg em brevem esse ap artet. Clo.

M e ipsum ames op ortet, nonmea . 010 .

R . G . V.- Pertinet, attinet, Praepositionem ad cum Aecusa

tivo sumunt : ut,

Ad remp ablicam p ertinet, me conservari . CIC.

Profundat, p erdat, pereat, nihil ad me attinet. TER .

R . G . VI. Interest et reffertGenitivum adm ittunt : ut,

Interest omnium rectéfacere. CIe .

R efert compos itionis , qua: quibus antep onas . 010 .

d o o o

Obs. 1. Cum 1118 Verb i s junguntur, loco Pronommum Personallum

Ablativi fem inini,med, tad, sud, nostrci, vestrd, subauditavoce

re ut,’

E t tad etmed interest te va lere. CIc .

Quid réfertmed, cui serviam 9— PH E DRUS.

Obs . 2 . A dduntur h is Verbis G enitivi E stimationis, tanti, quantimagni , pa rvi , p luris ut,

Utriusque nostriim magni interest, at te videam . Cic.

Hoc nonpluris réfert,qudm s i imbrem incribrumgeras. —PLA UT.

Not. 1.—Verba Neutra‘

inPassivaVoce impersonaliter usurpantur pro

quibuslibet personis, Ablativo personae cum Praepositione ab

vel exp resso vel intellecto : ut,

A b omnibus reclam atum est. ( scil. omnes reclamdrunt. ) —CIC.Quid ag itur? statur. (scil. statur a nobis, Slve stama s . )— Tna.

Not. 2. Cap it, debet, desinit, p otest, solet, incip it, Infinitivis Impersona

lium praeposita, ipsa fiunt Impersonalia : ut,

Pigere eumfacti caep it.— J usr.

Penmu'

ri ad summa , nisi ex principns, nonpotest.—m '

t.

SENTENTIA RUM CoNSTRUCT lo . 109

DE CONSTRUCTIONE VERBORUM PA SSIVORUM.

5 162. R . G .— Activa sententia fereemmis ita inPassivam eon

verti potest, utNom inativus A ctives sententiae fiat inPassivaAblatlvus Agentis.

A . Si Aetivae senten__tiaeVerbum A ccusativum habet prepioris

Objeetl, Verbum 111 Pass iva personale erit, A ccusativo

A cti vae 111 Nommatlvum Passivee transeunte ut,

A CT . Eg reg i e consul rem g essit.PASS . Eg reg ieab consule res g esta est. LIV.

B. Sinminus, Verbum Pas sivae impersonale crit, et vel sinecasu stabit, vel eundem casum reget, quem inA etivfi

regebat : ut,

ACT . Hostes constanter pugnabant.PASS. Ab hostibus constanter pugnabatur. Cms.

ACT . M edicine nos zndig emus. CIC .

PASS. M edicine a nobis indig etur .

A CT . M ihi isti nocere nonp ass ant.PA SS. M ihi ab istis noceri nonp otest. Clo.

ACT . Litibus etjurgns sup ersedere vos e quum est.

PASS. L itibus et jurg iis sup ersederi a vobis e quum

est— Clo.

Obs . Ubi nihil ambigui esse potest, supprim itur Ablativus Agentis

post Impersonalia Passiva : ut,

Itar inantiquam s ilvam. VIRG.Nonpotestjucandé vivi, nis i cum virtute vivatur. CIC.

Not. 1 .— H inc apparet, eosdem casus a Passivis Verbis regi

o

, atque ab

Activis, pre terquam unum Accusativum propi ori s Objecn.

Exem p la pete supra: B.

Not. 2. Vapulo, veneo, exulo, liceo, fio, cum quibusdam , vi Passivi

construuntur ut,

Testis ab reo fustibus vapulavit. QUINTILIANUS.

Mala a cive sp oliari, qudm ab haste ve'

nire. QUINT.

Torqueor, infesta ne vir ab haste cadat. Ov

DE CONSTRUCTIONE PARTICIPIORUM.

i 163. R . G .— Participia, quaeVerbi Adjectiva sunt, cum Sub

stantivis attribuuntur, tum etiam reguntcasusVerboruma quibus oriuntur, Activa Activorum,DeponentiaDept»nentium , Passiva Passivorum.

110 SYNTAXIS, SIVE

Obs. Partic ipu Pre teriti usus inVerbis Passivis atque inDe !

ponentibus accurate distinguendus est : in Pass ivis

enim A ctiveusurpati nunquam potest: inDeponentibus

plerisque solum Activé usurpatur : ex Deponentibustam enTransitivis multa sunt, quorum Particip ia Prae

terita tam Pass ivequam A ctive. Significant.

( Obs . 2 . Ce natus , pransus , fisus, juratus, et ausus,Gavi sus, solitus , ceu Deponentia recte

Construim o s, licet Activis orientia Verb is

H is etiam exam s , p erte sus , et adde p erosus .

(Obs. Particip ium indus Passive semper significat.]ut, Cernimus ire suis p arentiafinibus astra . MANILIUS.

Virg o compositas ostentatura cap illos . AUso s .

Nubiferi montes et saxa minantia ce lo . SILIUS.

Nil oritar um alias , nil artam talefatemur. HonDuces j

'

unctos virtute canemus . Hon.

Ausi omnes immane nefas , ausoque p atiti.— VIRG.

Omnia ei que sita , meditata, evig ilata erant. GELLIUS

Male parta male dilabantur. CIC.

Paridem solitus contendere contra .-VIRG .

Ocalas exosa viriles . Cv.

Pueris sententias ediscendas damus . SEN.

Vita data estutenda, datar sinefenore nobisMutua

, nec certo p ersoluenda die. Ov .

DE INFINITIVO SUBSTANTIVE POSITO, ET DE

CONSTRUCTIONIBUS GERUNDIORUM, GERUN

DIVI, ET SUPINORUM .

164. Infinitivus cum Gerundns et Supinis Substantivum Verbieffieit.

R . G . I. Infinitivus Nominativi vel Accusativi loco saepe

ponitur : ut,

Invidere nancadit insapientem. CIC.

Dulce etdecorum estpro atrid mori . HonVellc suum caique est. PERS .

M ari nemo sap iens miseram dixerit. 010 .

M altum interest interdare etaccip ere. SEN.

165 . R. G . II.— Gerundia pro casibus Infinitiv i ponuntur, et

i a regunt casus snorum Verborum ; sed sine casu

equentiixs apparent.

l 12 SYNTAX IS, SlvE

InVerbis Transitivis rarior est Impersonalis constructio , est

tamenubi obv iam fit : ut.

E ternas quoniam p e nas inmorte timendum.— LUCR .

Gerundivum enim ipsum , Adjective positum . suépte vi Necessi

tatem exprim it ut,

Deus et diligendus est et timendus .— T ERT ULLIANUS.

Agnoscenda ctamp lectencla suntbeneficia d ivina .— S. CY PR IANUS.

R . G . V. Supinum inum, v i A ctivapraeditum , suiVerbicasam regit; postponitur autem , ut A ccusativus, Verbismotum signifieantxbus, ad A etionis finem indieandam :

ut,

Ast eg o nonGrans servztum matribas ibo . VIRG .

Coriolanus inVolscos exsulatum obiit. LIv .

Spectatum veniant, veniant sp ectentar ut ip se . OV.

Scitatam oracula Phe bi mittimus . VIRG.

1768 . Ex Sup ino inum et Im personali Infinitivo iri conficitur Futu~rum Infinitivi Passiv i : ut,

Aud ieratnondatum irifi lio suo a z arem . TER .

R . G . VI.

— Supinum inu, vi Passiva praeditum , postponitur,

ut Ablativus R espectfis, tum multis Adjectivis, tum Sub

stantivisfa s, nefas, opus ut,

Nil dictufe dum visuqae he c limina tangatuer est. J UV.

vi sa) serp ens altaribus exit. Ov.

Not. Supina formam habent Substantivorum Quarte Declinationis

DE ADJ ECTIVORUM USU.

(a) Primus et extremas , postremus et ultimus , imus ,

Intimus et medias , sic summus et infimus , atqueCatara s et reliqaus , partitive attribuuntur

ut, Primd luce sammus mans a Labieno tenebatar. Cass.

(b) Neutra Adjectiva utriusqueNumeri ponuntur interdumAdverbialiter, praesertim apud poetas ut,

Serviete ternam, qui p arvo nescietuti . Hon.

A sp er, acerba tucus, retro redit. VIRG.

(c) Adjectivum saape ita attribuitur, utAnglice per Adverbium reddi necesse sit

Tum ta insiste aadax muris. LIV.

Castrie se pavidas tenebat. LIV.

SENTENTIAR UM CONSTRUCTIO. 113

5170. Superlativum ita usurpatur, utnonmodoaltissimpm omnium

gradum , sed etiam praealtum quemeunque desxgnet : ut,Ego sum miserior qudm la, que es miserrima . CIC.

Obs. Pronom enquisque Superlativo distribuendo adh ibetur : ut,

Ep icureas doctissimus quisque contemnit. CIC.

Maxime cuiqaefortune minimecredendum est. LIV.

DE NUMERALIUM USU.

5 17 1. A . Cardinalia.

(a) Unus non, nisi cum Emphasi, ponitur : ut,Matrone annam, atp arentem,

Brutum luxerunt. LIV.

Amicitie vis est in ea, at arms quas i animus fiat ea

p luribus . CIC .

Obs. Unus seepé v im habet Superlativam , seepe Superlativa

rum vim auget : ut,

Demosthenes anus emznet inter omnes aratores . CIC

P . Nigidius, anus omnium doctiss imus. CIC.

(b) M ille nunc Substantive, nunc Adjective, usurpaturmillio Substantivetantiim : ut,

Am

plias mille bominum ceci

’

dit. NEP .

M i le greg es illi . Cv .

Qaattuor millia hominum Cap itolium occup avére. LIV

B. Ordinalia inTemporum R ationibus usurpantur : ut,Plato una etoctog esimo anna scribens mortuas est. CIC.

Octavus annas est ex qua Britanniam vicistis .—TA C.

Obs. 1. Ad Ordinalia distribuenda usurpatur quisque ut,

Quinta quoqa e anna Sicilia tota censetur. CIC.

Obs. 2 . Alternunc ut secundus nunc utanus e duobus ponitur ut,

Alter ab undecimo tum me jam ceperat annas . Vl RGQuidquid negat a lter , et alter . H on.

0 , Distributiva effieiunt ut, quod fiat, euique e pluribus, vela quoque, vel quoque tempore factum esse appareat : ut,M ilitibus quini vicani denarndati sunt. LIV.

Verberibus mulcant, sexag eni singulos . TAC.

Urse p ariuntp larimitm quinos . PLIN.

£372. (a ) A s Romanus, sive Libra, anti uissim is temporibusmneus erat : unde Genltlvus e ris e liptice ponitur ali

quando, A ssibus 0 11118818 ut,

M illibus e ris quznquag inta census est. —Ln

1 14 SYNTAXIS, SIVE

Nummus R omanus, qui antiquissimé binas Asses cum

Sem lsse continebat, hmc Sestertius (sem is-tertius ) w ea

tus, Siglum habebat HS, corruptum ex IIS (25) m ,

Tiberias p opulo trecenos nummos vir itim dedit. SUE ’

I‘

.

Pretium constitutum est insingulos madiasHS terni .— C | C.

Sestertium eontinebat m ille Sestertios, et ipsum interdumSiglo HS designatur : ut,

Ducena sestertia singulis dedit. TAC.

Candidati HS quing ena deposuerunt. CIC .

Adverbia Num eralia , decies et que m ajora sunt, ubi numem m

Sestertio rum definiunt, suppleri sibi volunt centena millia : ut,

Vicies H S Sesterti i , Sestertmm) , id est, Nummu'

m.

Ter et quadrag ies H S Nummum.

DE PRONOMINUM USU.

Q173. A . Personalia et Possessiva.

(a) Pronom ina Pluralis , nos, noster, pro Singularibus ego,meus, seepeponuntur : ut,

NGris nos, inquit, doati sumus .— HOB .

Ad nostra me stadia rafaram literarum. CIC .

(b) Sui et suas Reflexiva sunt, et referuntur ad Subjeetumtertim Personae : ut,

Senatui popula s moderandi sui potestatem tradidit. CIC .

Themistocles domiciliam M'

agnesie sibi constituit. — NEP .

Sentit animus se vi sud, nonaliend, moveri . CIC.

Homerum Colopho nii civem esse dicunt suum . CIC.

Obs. l . Refert i possunt Refiexiva ad Objectum , si Ipsa Subjectoappendent, si Subjectum prime est aut secunda: Per

sonae, Si denique nullus ambiguitati locus est ; quad

ubi fit, Objecto p lerumque postponitur Refiexivum : ut,

Scipianem imp ellit astentatio sui . Cass .

Ce sarem sua natam mitiorem facit. CIc

Ap ibas fructum restituo suum . PH JED.

Suis flumm is delete Fidenas . LIV.

Malta sunt civibus inter se communia . CIC.

( Obs .) Sed Pronom inis quisque casibus R eflexivum praeponitur : ut.

Sui ca ique mores finguntfortunam .— NEP.

Longius autp rop ias mars sua quemque manet. PROPERT .

Obs. 2. R eferunture tiam R eflexiva ad Personam indefinitam : ut,

Subsequitur ce ca s Amor sui. Hon.

Deforme est de se p re dicare. CIC.

Diflicile est sua vi tia ndsse. - Cxc.

SYNTAXIS, SIVE

176 . D. Indefinita, quis et qui, sequuntur plerumque Particulas

quales suntne, si, s ive, nis i, qui, qua, qudm, quam, uncle, abi,at, an, nam. A liqa is et aliqa i ponuntur vel sine Particulis, vel cum Particulis, sensu m inus indefinito quinn

quis et qui ; ut signifieetur is, quem existere credimus,

sed nondum novimus ut,

[

O

vpp ida ceperantmunire etp onere leg es,c quis f ar esset, neu latro, neu quis adulter . Ho s

S i mala condideritinquem quis carmina ,ja s est— Hon.

Semp er aliqui anqa irend i suntquos dilig amus . CIC.

S i sup erestaliqais postfunera sensus. Cv.

177 . Obs . 1. Aliquis interdum p ro eximio ponitur : ut.

Sese a liquem credit.— PER S.

Obs . 2 . Quidam definitius est qui m aliquie ; ut significetur is, quemnovimus quidem , sed nonnom inamus : ut,

Accurrit quidam, nota s mihi namine tantilm. Hon.

( Obs ) Hine cum contemptu ponitur aliquando : ut,

Habitanthic que dam malieres p aup ercale .— TER

CONJ UNCTIONIBUS SOCIATIVIS ET

DISSOCIATIVIS.

Conjunctiones Sociativae et Dissociative similes Casus,Modes, et Tempora connectant ut,

M r‘

atar portas , strep itumqae, et strata viarum.—VIRG.

Virtus nec erip i nee surri i p otest. CIC.

Amicitia conveniens est res vel secundas vel adversas.

CIC.

Nisi alia Constructionis ratio intercedat ut,

Pompeias Dyrra chi i, Apollonie ,omnibusque opp idis maritimil

hiemare constituit. - C4E s.

Obs. 1 . Conjunctiones Sociativaa per A syndetonom ittuntur : ut,

Ex cup idita tibus odia , dissid ia , seditianes, bella nascuntur.— CIC .

Obs. 2 . Comparationi inserviunt ac, a tque, interdum et, que, at, po st

Adjectiva vel Adverb ia Sim ilitudinis et Diss im ilitudimw

Par, disp ar, a lia s , similis. diversa s , et idem,

Proinde, p erinde, p ro ea, contra , contrari a s, e qaé,

Queis aliter, pariter, juxta . seca s adde , s imulque

ut, Dissimulatio est, qaum alia d icuntur ac sentias . CIC.

Obitumfi lie tue p ro 90 ac deba i gra viter ta li . CIC.

Omnia feré contra ac d icta sunt caene‘

re. CIC.

P ro civium sa lute e qué a c pro med laboravi . CIC.

Simul atque na tum animal est, gaw let volup tate. Cw.

SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 117

DE VERBI TEMPORIBUS ET MODIS.

$ 179 . I. 0 11111 18 Actio in Tempore ponitur, vel Pre senti, vel

Praeterito, velFuture ita vero, ut vel altera temporali

relatione _careat, vel habeat alteram relationem tem

poralem .

A . Tempera Verbalia, quae altera temporali relatione carent

(Aorista, Indefinita, sive Absoluta) , sunt

a . Praesens Aoristum , scribo, Anglice I write.

b. Pre teritum Aorlstum , scrip si,c. Futurum Aori stum , scribam, I shall writs

B. Tern ra Verbalia, quae habent alteram relationem tempo

r em (Relativa) sunt

( I) Praesenti, scribe, Anglice I am writing .

(2 ) Preeterita, scrip s i , I ha ve written.

(3) Futura, scripturus sum,I am about to write.

a ) Praesenscum R elatione

'

b Pr teritum ( I ) P re senti, scribebam, I wa s writing .

£3

; 1' tione (2) Preeteritzi , scrip seram, I had written.

cum e d

(3) Futura, scr ip turus fui , I wa s a bout to write.

i n) Futurum ( 1) Pre senti, scribam , I sha ll be writing .

ohm Relatione (2 ) Praeteritaiwcrip sera, I sha ll ha ve written.

(3) Futura, scrip ta rus era, Ishallbeaboattowrite.

Obs. 1 . Temporum Passiverum s im ilis est ratio .

Obs. 2 . Tempus historicum inprim is est Pre teritum Aoristum . Mul

tus autem inh istoriausus est Praateritorum Relativorum (bPre sens etiam h istori cé usurpatur, ut legentium eculis

quasi p ingatur acti o : ut,

Dimisso senata , decemviri prodeunt in concionem, abdicantu

que se mag istrata , ingenti hom inum le titid.— L IV.

Ube. 3. Inep istolis Romani Praeterito feré utebantur, ubi nos Pre sent}utimur : ut,

R es , quum h e c scribebam, erat insummo discrimine. CIC.

Obs . 4. Perfectum eleganter exprim it quae c itd velmore fiunt ut,

Terra trem it fugerefere . VIRG.

Qui studet opta tam cursu contingere metam

Malta tulitfecitqa e p uer. H o s .

Ex M'

odis,

A . Indicativus enuntiat absolute.

B. Imperativus imperat vel hortatur.

Obs . 1.Ne proh ibitiva Im perative vel Subjunctive jungitur:We qua meis esto d ietls mora .

— V11 3 .

Ne conferas culpam inme. TER.

118 SYNTAXIS, SIVE

Obs . 2 . Pro Imperative eleganter ponitur Futurum Simplex : ut.

Nonverbum verba carabis reddere. Hon.

Si quid a ccideritnevi, facies at sciam. CIC.

C. Conjunctivi triplex usus est

(a) Potentialis ; qui speeiem habet vel conditionalem, vel

permi ssivam ,vel dubitativam : ut,

Id arbitrar appr imé in aitd esse utile, atne quid nimi sIta s ine invalid lundem invenias , et amicos pares .

-TER .

S i s ine p ace tad atque invito numine TroesItaliam paliere, luantp eccata , neqae illosJ uveris auxilzo . VIRG .

E laguar ansileam OV.

Obs 1. Peculiaris usus est Perfecti Potentialis, ut aflirmet, neget,aut vetet cum urbanitate et m oderatiene quadam ut,

Bratijud icium, pa ce tad d ixerim, longé antep ono tua. CIC.

Nil ego contulerim ja cundo sanus amico. Hon.

Obs . 2 . Eleganter usurpari soletFuturum Perfectum pro Simplini

Futuro : ut,

Ah , si pergis, abiero.— TER .

Hoe m ihi gratiss imumfeceris .— CIC.

(b) Optativus ; vel sine Partieula, vel post Particulas na,utinam, O si, s i, atpro atinam ut,

’

aleant cives mei, s int incolumes, sint beati CIC.

Ita vivam atmaximas sump tas facio CIC .

Ne s im salvas si aliter scribe ac sentia l CIC .

m inus vite cup idifuissemus .— CIC .

O mihi p re ter itos referat si J up iter annas — VIRG .

Ut illum dii dee quc p erdant.’ TER .

(c) Subjunctivus proprle dietus, quia Verbis et Partivulis

subjungitur.

D. Superlus dictum est Infinitivum quasi SubstantivumVerbi esse, quod vel subjective vel objective stare posset.

J am verb Simplex Infinitivus

(a) Subjectivejungitur Verbis Impersonalibus : ut,J uvat ire sub umbras .

— VIRG .

Noncaiais homini canting it adire Corinthum. Hon.

Libet semp er discere. CIC .

(b) Objective sequitur multa inprimis

( 1) VerbaVoluntatis, volo, nolo, mala, aveo, cap za,

(2) Verba Potentiae, Ofii cu, et_

Consuetudinis, p ossum, queo,nequeo, debeo, soleo, consuesco, &c.

120 SYNTAXIS, szva

BARS IL

DE COMPOSITA SENTENTIA .

180. PREFATOR Y EXCURSION.

“

I. Oratio Recta m eans any statement, commamd, orquestiondirectly p l t.

Oratio Oblique m eans any statem ent, comm and, o r questionindirectlyput, depending onsom e verb w hich stands inO ratio Recta.

Thus , Valeo , Anva let Va le, are Oratio Recta : Wh ile Scin’me valere?

Nescio an vuleat,Cara at va lea s

, contain Oratio Obliqua ; m e calere

depending onthe Oratio R ecta scin’

an valeat onnescio ut valeas

Onea rn.

11. A Compound Sentence consists of tw o or more Simple Sentencesconnected together ; of w h ich one is the Principal, the others e ithe r

( A ) Co ordinate, o r ( B) Subordinate.

A . A Coordinate Sentence is one wh ich does not depend inconstructionuponthe Principal Sentence . Coordinate Sentences are introducedby such particles as et, que, nec aut, vel , sed, autem nam, enim ;

ig itur, itaque de inde, denique & c. : as , Gyges a nulla videbatur ; iI‘

se

a utem omnia videbat. CIC.

B. A Subordinate Sentence is one wh ich depends inconstructiononthePrincipal Sentence. Subo rdinate Sentences are of three kinds

(1 ) Substantival : ( 2 ) Adverb ia] : (3 ) Adjec tiva].A Substantival Sentence is one w h ich stands , like a Substantive, asSubject, Object, or inA pposition. Substantival Sentences belong toOratio Obliqua . and are of three kinds :

‘

(a ) Oblique Enuntiation:

(b) Oblique Petition: (c ) Oblique Interrogation.

( a ) The Oblique, o r Indirect Enuntiation, is form ed generally by theA ccusative w ith Infinitive Moed, som etimes byutw ith Subjunctive,or quad w ith Indicative or Subjunctive Mood. T hus, Amicitia , nis i

inter banos , esse nonp otest, is a DirectEnuntiation: w hilst Verumest, amicitiam, nisi inter bones , esse nonposse, is a Compound Sen

tence, conta ining th e Direct Enunciation, Verum est, and the

Ob lique Enunciation, am icitiam, nis i inter bones , esse nanposse

w h ich is Substantival, being he Subject of the Verb est, andhaving verum for its Predicate . So , invidia glorie comes e st, is a

Direct Enunciation; but Est hoc commune vitium, at invidia glories

comes sit, is a Compound Sentence, containing the ObhqueEnuntiatmn, a t invi d i a glorie comes sit, inApposition to hoe, the

Subject of est, of w h ich commune mtium is the Predicate. Again,Ca let ignis is a Direct Enuntlatlon Sentimus ca lere ignem a Com .

pound Sentence, having the Direct Enuntiation sentimus, andthe Oblique, calere ignem, w h ich is the Object of sentimus .

(b) The Oblique Petition is formed by the Subjunctive Mood, w ith

SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIU. 121

or w ithout the Conjunctionat orne, or by the Infinitive ; follow ingVerbs of des ire. command, endeavour, 860 . Thus Mane insententid

is a Direct Petition, w hich may be expressed ina Compound Sen

tence by Oro ut manea s in sententié , Ora ma iled : in sententici, or

Ora te manere insententid.

( e) The Oblique Interrogationis formed by depend ent lnterrogatives,w hether Pronouns ? ” Particles , governing a Subjunctive Mood.

Thus Quis est? is a Direct Interrogation: but Nescio quis s it,

incertum est quis sit, are Compound Sentences, containing the

Oblique Interrogation, quis sit, w hich is the Object ofnescio, andthe Subject of est.

(2 ) An Adverbial Sentence is one w h ich qualifies the Principal Sentence like an Adverb, answ ering the questions, how. why, when, & c.

A dverbia] Sentences are form ed by Conjunctions, and are : (a ) Consecutive (so tha t) ; (b ) Final ( in order that) ; ( c) Causal (becauses ince) ; (d ) Tem poral (when, while, until, gm) ; ( e) Conditional

( if, unless ) ; (f ) (‘

oncessive (although, whereas ) ; (g) Comparative

(a s if, a s though, gm) .

( 3) AnAdjectiva] Sentence is one w hich qualifies the Principal Sentence like anAdjective or Ep ithet. It is formed by the Relative

Pronounqui , or by a R elati ve Particle.

The Relative Pronoun qui qua: quad (w ith its Particles ) has

great influence in Latin Construction. It is of all persons, andmay be used compendiously as a substitute for the unionof a Conjunctionw ith a Personal Pronoun. . Hence it fo rms CoordinateSentences w henused for et ego, et tu, et is , &c. ; for ego autem , tu

autem, is autem , Si c . for ego ig itur, tu ig itur, is ig itur, &c . for ego

enim, tnenim, is enim, &c . And it form s Subordinate Sentencesw henused for at ego, ut tu, at is

, &c . ; for quia ego, quia tu, quia is,&c. for si ego, si tu, s i is , &c. for ets i ego, etsi tu, etsi is ,

Note. It is to be observed that Subordinate Sentences may have others

subordinate to them , inrelationto w hich they are therefore principalclauses. From what has beensaid ofSubstantivalSentences, it appearsthat such principal clauses of Oratio Obliqua are, mostly, either inthe Infinitive or inthe Subjunctive Mood. Its subordinate clauses

generally take the Subjunctive as may be seen in the subjo inedexample

Oratio Rea m—Ara caricm rerum est, qua: s ciuntur oratoris autem omni s

actio op znwm bus , non scientid continetur nam - et

apud cos d icimus , qui nesciunt, et ea elicimus , qm

nescimus ips i . Cw .

O ratio Obliqua— (Antonius apud Ciceronem doest Artem eo r um rerurr

esse, qua: sciantur oratoris autem omnem a ctionem

opinions , nonscientia, contineri quia etapud ecs dicut,

qui nesciant, et ip se dicat, quod nesciat. q N'r.

Oratio R ecta may be virtually oblique, w hen it contains the statementof an Opinion or thought. Thus , the sentence. Themz stocles noctuambulabat, quad semnam capere non posset, implies that Them istoclesalleged inab ility to sleep as the reasonwhy he w alked by night

e raxm, SIVE

DE SENTENTIIS SUBSTANTIVALIBUSJ

5 181 (A ) Enuntiatio Obliqua.

R . G .— Infinitivus cum Accusativo sui Subj eeti

(a) SubjectivejungiturCopulae estetVerbis Impersonalibus :ut,Facinas est vinciri cicem Romanum. CIC .

Omnibus bonis exp edit salvam esse rempublicam. Clo.

Constat leg es ad salutem civium inventas esse. CIC .

(b) Objective jungitur multis Verbis, inquibus inest sen~tiendi aut declarandi v is : ut,Pomp eies desedisse term motu audivimus .

— SEN.

Xenop hanes a it lanam habitari . CIC .

(c) Appositionem facit aliquando ut,

Illud temeré dictum, sap ientes omnes esse bonos . CIC.

Obs . 1. Pro hoc Infinitivo scepe ponitur ut cum Subjunctivo : ui

R eliquum est ut ofiiciis certemus inter nos . Cxc.

Exp edit ut civitates sua jura habeant. J UST .

Illud med refert, te ut videam . CIC.

Suapequad cum Indicativo , ui poscatur Subjunctivus : ut,

Gra tum est qudd p atrice civem p Opuloque dedisti. - J UV.

Hoe prcestamus maz iméferis , quo‘

d loquimur. CIC.

Mitto qudd omnes mea s temp estates subieris. CIC.

Obs . ) Oportetetnecesse est, Subjunctivum regentia, ui om ittunt ut,

PhilosoPhice servias oportet, ut liber s is . Crc .

Virtus volup tatis ad itus intercludat necesse est. CIC

Obs. 2 . Sperand i et pollicendi Verba m alunt Infinitivum Futuri : ut,Sp erabam id me assccuturum . CIC.

Pollicebatur p ecuniam se esse redditurum . CIC.

Obs. 3. Post metuendi formulas regunt Subjunctivum ne et a t pro

ne non ut,

Verendum estnefames inurbe sit. CIC.

O puer, ut s is vita lis metno. Hon.

Indignationem notat Infinitivus Interrogans : ut,Mene incepto desistere victam a c .

Vel ejus vice ut cum Subjunctivo : ut,Te ut ulla resfrangat CIC.

5 182 . (B) Petitio Obliqua.

R . G . Op tandi, rog andi, hortandi , imperandi, p ermittend i. cu

randi, enitendi, efi ciendi, sim ilibusque formulis additur

Subjunctivus cum Conjunctionibus ut,ne, vel omissé

aliquando Conjunctione :

(a) Subjective ut,

Postulatur ab amico ut sit sincerus . CIC.

Cavendum estne assentatori patefa‘

cias

Ewe omnia pnetermittas licet. CIC.

£245 arm -

Am s, SIVE

Obs. Tantum abest duas sententias sibi subordinatas habet, primamSubstantivalem , alteram Adverbialem : ut,

Tantum d best ut nostra miremur, ut nobis non satisfaciatip se Demosthenes . CIC.

185 . (B) Finales Sententiae.

R . G .— Ut, ne, utne, finali sensu, Subjunctivum postulant : ut,Utjugulent homines, surgunt de nocte latrone s .

— J UV.

Legum idcireo servi sumas , utliberi esse poss imus .— Crc .

Ne vana urbis magnitude sit,Romulus asylum aperit.

—LIV.

Scip io r ue abiit, ne ad causam dicendam adesset. CIC .

Exerc

éznda est animadversio ut ne quid temere agamus .

IC.

5 186. (C) Causales Sententiae.

R . G . I. Quum, causali sensu, Subjunctivum plerumqueregit ; sed interdum Indicativum : ut,

Qua:quum ita sint, inalia omnia abeo. CIC .

Quum inMatiifamiliaritatem eenisti, g audeo.— 010 .

R . G . II. Qubd, quand o, qui a , quaudoquidem , quoniam , siqui

demque, causali sensu, Indicativo gaudent, nisi opus sit

Subjunctivo : ut,Adsuntprop terea qubd ofiieium sequuntur. CIC

quia

ferieulum metuunt. CIC.

D icite, quan oquidem inm olli eonsedimus herbé.-VIRG.

Quoniamjam nos: est, discedite. LIV.

(D) Temporales Sententi ae.

R . G . I. Quum, quando, quoties, simul, ut, simul atque, ubi

p ostquam, temporales, Indicativo gaudent : quum sarpe

Subjunctivo, post et ante Tempus Praeteritum : ut,

Tua res ag itur, p aries quum p roximas ardet. Hos .

Ut veni eorum,nonsum p ermulta loeutus .

-HOR .

M iserum estfodere, ubi sitisfauces tenet. PLAUT .

Z enonem,uum Athenis essem,

audiebamfrequenter .— t .

Decessit g esilaus , quum inp ortum venisset. NEP .

R . G . IIu—Dum,donec, ad, antequam, p riusquam, pro

Sententia loci, nunc ndicativum , nunc Subjunctivumcapiunt : ut,

Homines, dumdecent, disc unt. SEN.

E xpectate dum consulfiat [Gem — Li v .

Cato, quoad vixit, virtutum laude crevit.-NEP .

Opp erire qu oad scire p oss is , quid tibi ag endum sit.— CIC

Antequa m oppr imit lust, erumpamus .- l _.

Providentia est, er quam animus aliquid videt, antequam

factum sit.‘rc .

SENTENTIARUM CONSTRUCTIO. 125

5188 . (E) Conditionales Sententiae.

R . G . I.- Si, nisi, ubi cond itio, ut incerta, preponitur, Cen

junctive praemittuntur ; alias, Indicativo : ut,S i vales, bene est— Cm .

Sincerum estnisi vas ,quedeunque infundzs aeescit. — Hoa .

Si quad eratgrands vas, tecti af erebant. Clo .

Si neles sunus, curres hgdrap ieus .— Hoa .

Sume, catelle nagat: si nondes , aptat. Hon.

foret interris, rideretDemocritus .— IIOR .

Si id seissem, nunquam hue tulissem p edem.— TER .

Si Atheniensis esses, clarus nunquamf’uisses . Cu:

B. G . II.— Madb, dum,

dummade, med'

e ut, conditionali sensu,Subjunctivum regunt : ut,M anent ingenia senibus ,mo

depermaneatindustria .—CIC.

Caligula Jaetabat illud : Oderintdum metzmnt.—SUET

Scies, madeut tacere p essis .— TER .

189. (F) Concessivaa Sententiae.

R . G . I.— E tsi, tametsi, etiamsi, pro renatanunc Indicativum

nunc Conjunctivum capiunt : ut,E tsi eidpd tenemur, seelere liberati sumas .

— CIC.

Obtundis, tametsi intellz'

g a— TER .

Etiamsi non is esset Ccesar qui est, tamen. ornandmvideretur. CIC .

R . G . II. Quamquam, utut, Indicativo gaudent : ut,

Quanquamfestinas , nanestmera lang a . Hon.

Utut erg a me estmeritus , mihi cerdi esttamen. PLAUT .

R . G . III. Quamvzs, quantumvis, licet, ut, quum, ne, concessw o sensu, Subjunctivum regunt : ut,

Quad turp e est, quamvis lateat, nonfiet henestum. CIC .

L icet vitium sitambitie , causa virtutum est. SEN.

Ut. desint vires, tamenest laudanda voluntas . Ov.

Phocienfuitp aup er, quum dieitiss imus esse p re set—Nap .

lVe sit summum malum dolor. malum certeest. —'

CIC .

Obs . l . Quamvis cum Indicativo reperitur apud historicos c i

poetas : ut,

Quamvis ingenionanvalet, arte va let. —Ov.

Obs . 2 . Eleganter excidunt Conjunctiones St, ets i ut,

Pa rtem op ere intanta, s ineretdolor, Ieare, haberes .— VIRGNaturam exp ella s fared, tamenusque recurret. -H oa .

5 180. (G) Comparatives Sententiae.

R . G . Comparatives Par‘

ticulae quasi , tanquam, aeu, uslut,cum Simi hbus, Subjunctivum regunt : .ut,

Parvi p rime ortujacent, tanquam sine anime sint— CIC.

Tum verb attoniti, ceu temp le irrumperethecticExsiluere patres .

— Su.

126 s'rm s, SIVE

DE SENTENTIIS ADJ ECTIVALIBUS.

191. R . G . I.— Relativum , qui qua: quad, Indicativo jungitur,

nisi Opus sit Subjunctive : ut,Quis fuit, herrendes primus qui pretulitenses — Ov .

Obs. Itidem Correlativa qualis, quantus, quot et Universalia quisquis, quicunque, quetcumque, cum sim ilibus.

5 192 . R . G . II. Qui, causali sensu, Subjunctive gaudet ut,

M iecret tui me, qui hunefaeias inimicum tibi . Tea.

Obs . Ita nonque, pro nonquad : ut,

Nonque quenquam p lus amemeafeci . T ER .

Nat. Sim iliter construitur nanquinpro nanquia nan.

g? 193 R . G . [ IL Qui, concessivo sensu, Subjunctive gaudet : ut,

Eg emet, qui leviter e cas literas attig issem, tamenAthenis eemmoratus sum. CIC.

194. R . G . IV. Qui, finali sensu, Subjunctivum regit : ut,

Litteras misi, quibus etp lacarem eam etmenerem. CIC.

Obs . H ine qua pro at ca Subjunctivum reg it ut,

Agar navatur, que meliores fetus eda t. CIC.

5 195. R . G .V. Qui, consecutive sensu, Subjunctivum regit

(a) Post Demonstrativa, talis , is pro talis, tantus , tam, adee,sim ilia : ut,

Nonis sum qui hi s rebus deleeter. CIC .

Nihil tanti estque vendamus libertatem. 010 .

(b) Om isso Demonstrative : ut,Audies ea:me quad nanemnes p robant.— 010 .

(0) Post Comparativum etqudm : ut,

Majera deliquerantqudm quibus ignasei p osset. Liv

(d) Post dignus, indignus, idoneas , aptus ut,

Dignas estqui imp eret.— Cro .

(e) Ubicunque significat talis ut: sic enim construitur

(1) Post est, sunt, invenio, rep erie, habee, similia : ut,E stqui vinei p assit.

— Hon.

Inventus estquiflammis imp eneretmanum.- L1v.

Habes qui ass ideat,fementa paret.— HoR .

(2) Post aliquis, p auei, multi, solus, sim ilia, indefinite poSlta : ut,

E staliquid quad nonap orteat, etiamsi licet— CIC .

Selus es, Cai Caesar, cujus invictarid nemo eecideril

nis i armatus .— Cl e .

128 SYNTAXIS, SIVE

(b) Sequente Verba sine alteraNegativa ut,

Ne ad Catenem quidem prevecabo.— Clc

O. (a) N5, an, interrogativae particules, dubitanter interrogant : num responsionem expectatuegativam :nouns ,annen afiirmatxvam : ut,

Qualis esttua mans p etesne dieere- Clc .

Antume tristem esse putas— PLAUT .

Num negare audes CIC.

Canis nonne similis lupe est?— Clc .

(b) InDuplici Interrogatione sunt has varietates

1. Utrum sequente an ut,

c utrum abundautis ' anag entie signa s untCIC.

2. Num sequente an ut,

Num dues habetis patrias anest illa patria cem

mum'

s C10 .

3. NEsequente an ut,

R emamne venie an hie maneo an Arp inum

fugi e CIC .

4. Particule omissamequente anantné ut

Interragatur tria p auea sint anne multa CIC.

Qua ramjustum sitneene pe'

e'

ma -Hoa .

CONSTRUCTIONIBUS ORATIONIS OBLIQUZE.

R . G . I.— Sententia, quae subordinatm‘ Orationi Obliqum,

sive Relative sive Conjunctione intercedente, Subjunctivum exigit : ut,

Ais, quoniam sit nature mortalis, immortalem etiam esse

oportera— Crc .

Scito me,p ostquam inurbem venerim, redisse cum libris

ingra ham— CIC .

Fateor me oratorem, si madesim, ea: Academia: spatiis

exstitisse.— Crc .

Simile veri est, nanea: i i sdem semp er p opulis exercitusg ens bellum ia

Sap ieutissimum esse dicunt eum, cui, quad opus sit, ipu

veniat inmentem ; p rop ias aceedere illum, qui alterius

bene inventis ebtemp eret.— Clc .

Ca sar ad me scrip sit, g ratissimum sibi esse quad

qmeverim. CIC.

PRUSODL/E COMPENDIUM.

20 1. DE Syllabarum quantitate di sserit,Et de Metrorum legibus, Prosodia.

DE SYLLABARUM QUANTITATE.

DEFINIT IONES.

l . Mensura Tempus eioquendse est syllabae

Quod et vocatur Quantitas .

Obs . Vocalis observetur invocalium

Stat quantitate syllabarum quantitas.

2 Long i brevisque (u ) Temporis notas habes.

Obs . l . Singulis long is brevibusque binisPar est eademque potestas.

2 . Communis audit illa , quae interdum brev is ,Et rursus eadem longa vocalis sonat.

A'

at. H nonhabetur consonans, nullamque vim

Exe rcet inProsodi zi .

R EGULZE QUANT IT AT IS GENE R A LE S.

202 . R . G . I. Omnis Diphthongus contractaque Syllaba longsest

Utp rae'

s, lieu, g audens eoag o fit cog o, nihi'

l nil ;Pro bb

’

vibus bb’

bus ; mbmentum pro movimentam.

Obs . A t tu vocali p rceeuntem corrip ies prcs.

5203. R . G . II. DantDerivatis proprium Primaria tempus

Sic siili’

ceta salix, pomum pomaria format.

Obs . Fit tam en inm ultis aliter : sic aret arena ,

Sic Inimanus homo est sic li cet parva Iiicerna .

R . G . III. Nec nonSimplicium tempus Composta sequunturA puto sic rep iZto, sic a memor immcmor exstat.

Obs . Sunt excepta tam en: s ic nubo p roniiba format.

520 4 R . G . IV. Prsev ia vocali vocalis corripitur ceu

Princip i’

um, p rJ izibe

bs . l Sed m uita h inc excipe G raeca ut,

CJu'

ionis, fi né'

as , Clio, MyrtOus , Enjoo

PROSODDE

208 R . II.— Producuntur inA ; ceufrustra

'

,intra

’

que, p uraque .

Obs . Sed casus rectos et quartos exc ipe : quales ,

Carm ina Musd’

cauit ; resonant Amaryllidd’

sylva

A tque vocativos plerosque , ut Oresta’

, Thyestri

Eja’

, itd'

particulas, cumque h is quid, qua breviant a .

R . III. Corripiuntur inE : ceu legc'

timete'

carere'

.

E longam Prima casus Quinta que 1'

equ1runt,

Ut Thisbe, sp ecié qua derivantur ab illis ,

Ut quaré'

atque hod ié’

contractaque, qualia Te mpe'

Verba inca prim i numeri Mandantia , ut audé’

( Sed cavé’

sive cavé’

scribendi est a qua potestas)Ex Adjectivis Adverbia ducta Secunda ,

Ut miseré : jungantur ohé, ferméque , feréque

R . IV. Producuntur inI : ceu dict, orbique, doliquc.

Attam enh inc multos Gra corum dem e Dativos

Atque Vocativos, ut Thyrsid i , Phyllidi , Chlori

Sicubi, necubi dem e, nis i et qua s i , que is brevis est i.

(At mihi, ubi, tibi , ibi, sibi , communem facilmt i .)

R .V.— Producuntur inO : ceu virgo

’

, ultroque,juq ue

Atp uto'

finalem , scio'

, nescid’

, corrip iunt OAdde modd

’

et compbsta , duo’

, octo’

, egb’

, que is citb’ junge.

O prop rium claudens nom encommunis habetur,Ut Mat/to, (sed longa est inGra cis semper, ut Argo):

Qua dam Flaccus habet communia, plurima Naso,Plura poetarum corruptior addidit a tas.

R . VI.— Producuntur inU : sic tit, dictuque, diuque.

R . VII. Corripiuntur inY : sic dant chelg'

, T ip hij, poe‘as.

2 12 . R . VIII.— InC producuntur, ut illic (excipe doa ) .

R . IX . Corripe inL, D, T : sic Hannibal, illiid, amavit.

R . X . Corripiuntur inN : ceu culme'

n.

(At excipe Gra caMulta, ut Hyme

’

n, Aaron, vocali pra dita longa. )

R . XI. Corripiuntur inR'

: ceu calciir, amabitiir, Hectb'

r .

Obs. Gra ce. tam eh , cratér, a the'

r, producis, ct ae’

r.

g2 13. R . XII . Producuntur inAs ut terrc'

is

(Exc ipe Gra ce

Que1s G enitivus -cidis, ceu Palla’

s et excipe casus

Crescentfim quartos, ceu lamp ada’

s his ands adde .

COMPENDIUM. 133

R. XIII. Producuntur inE s, ut sede‘

s atque cidere'

s.

Obs . Exc ip ienda tam e h qua Gra c i corrip iunt ; utTroade

’

s exc ip ias etiam p ene’

s, excip iasque

Crescentis brevis est penultima queis Genitivi,Ut scye

’

s (at p arié‘

s semper producitur, atque

Pé’

s cum com positis : abie’

s , arié'

sque, Cere'

sque) .

6 2 14 . R . XIV. Corripiuntur inIs ceu diceris , utilis

,ens-Is .

Obs . Obliqui casus plurales excip iuntur,Ut terri s , vobis etiam persona secundaInprim o num ero Quarta Pra sentis , ut m id i s

Composita a vi s. s i s malts , noli sque , veli sque .

(Se'

d ris Pra teritl et persona secunda FuturiA ctiva Vo eis recte comm unis habetur ;Feceris , addideris, tuler is . ) E tnom ina producCrescentis longa est penultim a queis Genitivi,Ut Samni s itidem Simb

’

i s, grati sque ,fori sque.

g 2 15 . R . XV.~ Producuntur inOs ut ventbs atque sacerdos .

Obs . Corrip ienda tam eh qua G ra ci corrip iunt, ut

Pha sidb’

s, Argos , ep o’

s. Sic comp b’

s et imp cis, 0’

s, exb’

s .

R . XVI. Corripiuntur inUs ceu temp iis, amamiis , et intzis .

Obs. H inc Quarta casus contractos exc ipe, ut artus

Longaque crescentis penultim a queis Genitivi,Ut telli s incz

’

i sque, juventii s atque senectusProducta a Gra cis, ut Sapphii s atque Melamp zi s ,A tque pus cunctis venerandum nom enIes ii s.

R . XVII. Corripiuntur inYs : chely'

s ut, chlamys, Ot/zrc ,

E rinny'

s .

Not. Duc it ab Auctorum scriptis ea syllaba tempus,R egula quam lougaw nulla brevemve facit.

DE METRORUM LEGIBUS.

DEFINIT IONES.

1 . Inproferendis syllabis A rsinvoca

Elationem voeis (huic Ictus com es) ;Thesisque contra voeis est depressio .

Pes syllabarum est certa consecutio

Pedumqne certa consecutio Rhythmus

Apud poetas Versus est nomenRhythnn

Certumque Versuum ordinem Carmenvoca

M etrumve et audit certa parsVersusM etrum.

2 . Syllaba longa brev i subjecta vocatur Iambus u

Quod si longa brevi pra cesserit, ille Trochamc a

Pyrrhichius brevibus voluit consistere bm is v v

134 PROSODIE

JS'

pondeus binis voluit consistere longisactylus eificitur longabrevibusque duabus

Postque breves binas Anap a'stus simplice longa v u

Tribrachynhuc brevibus formatum subjice ternis. u v u

1. Quem Thesis incip iat, dices a scendere Rhythmum

Quale tuus spec im enversus, Iambe, dah it

Ca perit ex A rsi contra, descendere dices

Dactyle, tu talem , tuque, Trocha e, fac is.

2 . Metrum inDactylico carm ine singuli,At b ini inreliquis constituunt pedes.

3. Complendis m etris cui syllaba deficit una,H ie Versus Catalecticus audit.

Comp lendis m etris cui deerit syllaba duplex,Ille Brachycatalecticus audit.

Syllaba cui superest completis unica m etris,Versus Hyp ercatalecticus audit.

Cui nih il aut deest aut superest, teres atque rotundusVersus is A catalecticus audit.

DE SCANSIONE ET FIGUR IS SCANSIONIS.

5218 . Scansio, Iquam varila con| cinnant arte Filgura ,

Distribu | itVer | sum pro rati | one Peldum .

A . Vocalem elidit Synalcep ha inlim ite voeis,Si Vocalis erit subnexa inlim ine voeis ;

Phyllid’

am’

ant’

ali |as : nam me dislcedere fl evd‘

(pro Phyllida, amo, ante.)Obs . 1 . Interdum legem Synaloepha infringit H iatus

Ter sunt Icona lti imlp onere IPelid Ossam .

Obs. 2 . Hen, O, et ah nunquam vocalis proxim a delet.

B. E cthlip sis Vocalem atque m de limite trudit,SiVocalis erit subnexa inlim ine voeis ;

O culras komin’

O quant’

est in rebus inlaue.

(pro hominum, quantum .)

5219 . C. Syllaba de binis conflata Syna resis audit,Ut monstrant deest, dein, aureos, alvearia , Thesez.

Obs. Apud poetas jura consonantiumSubinde sum it I vel U

Fluviorum res: E ridanus. Labat aricte mum s.

Génua tremunt. Pectunt et té'

nuia vellera Safes .

”

D. Una sed inbinas divisa Dicereszs audit

Quod tibi Na'

iades monstrant flavique Sucvt

Obs . Ponitur U pro V: s iliias , solditque videbis.

136 PROSODIAC

III. DE CARMINE HEROICO ET DE CARM I‘

NEELEGIA CO.

223. Hexametris gaudet solis Hero ica Musa

Hexametros Elegi Pentametrosque ligantObs . Disticha perfectum m alunt includere sensum

Nec s im plicis sententiaConstructionem distich is scindi placet.

224. HEXAMETRI DACTYLICI

(QUI ET VERSUS MEMORIALES SUNT DE VOCUM DIFFEREBTIA ) .

Cantat acantkis av is, sed doret acanthus inag ris.

Insiliiis deer est : equus deer Olympia vincit.

Qui fert arma humeris, armo dux fertur equino .

Mel vaga condit tip is deus est E gyptius Ap is .

Vexat asilus equos ; m iseros excep it asylum .

Qui sculpit, occlut, qui servat condita, celat.Voce ciines ; duc eja canes, nisi tempora canes .

Tenduntur nexi casses ; nitct a rea cassis .

Cass ide cinge caput : capiuntur cassibus apri.

C'é

'

do facit cess i cecz'

di eado ; ca do ceeidi .

Clava ferit : clavus firmat ; elavisque recludit.

Fert ancilla cb’

lum ; penetrat res hum ida colum.

Rusticus arva c it, sed célat turbida v ina .

Cominus ense feris ; jacta cadis eminas hastfi.

Ut placeas c iti,mores cb

’

mes indue crimes.

Coma di scenam , co’

médones qua rite canam.

Causale doctores ; sic tu tibi consulis ipsi.Bellandi cup ido nocuit sua sa pe cup ido.

Carm ina dicuntur, Dom ino dum templa dicantur.

Solvere difi'

idit, nodum qui difi'

idit ense.

Uxorem ducit v ir ; nubit sponsa marito.

E ducathie catulos, ut mox educat inapros.

Si tibi nonest ces , Es inops, et pinguia nonl2s .

Fallit sa pefré’

tum placido nim is a quorefré'

tu

Fructus arboribus,frug es nascuntur inagris.

Sol nubesjug at, etfiig it irreparabile tempus.

A les hirundo volat ; nat hirudo ; vernat arundo .

Per quod quis peccat, per idem m ox plectitur idem.

Ditli cilis labor est, cujus sub pondere labor.

Frons pueri est levis , le’

vis autem lingua puella .

Insilvis lé'

p b’

res , inverbis qua re le'

po'

res .

Nonlicet asse mihi, qui me nonasse licetur.

Male ego ma'

la m eabona quam me‘

ila frangereZlIerr ve

’

nit, mercesque vénitqua sita labore.

JIulcet amante manu, dum mulg et Sylvia vaccalm

COMPENDIUM . 137

Carus eris Domino, miseris si miseris aurum.

Nité'

re, parve puer, cupies quicumque nitére.

Oblita qua fuco rubet, est oblita decori.

Occidit ille dolo turpi, quem occidit amicus

Opp erior Caium qui pullo dp eritur amictu.

Os (Gris) mandatk sed o'

s (ossis) manditur Ore .

Uxoris p dre'

re etp é ro’

re, p a

'

rare mariti est.

Parentes pueri faciunt gaudere p a'

rentes .

Ni p ende'

re miles, nondebita p ende'

re n6les .

Lude p i lc'

i : p ilum torquetur : p ila columna est.

Pro reti et regione pla’

ga est ; pro verbere p ldga.

Sunt cives urbis pdpulus ; estpo

pulus arbor.

Si v itare pdtes, ne plus duo pocu a pates .

P rora prior, pupp is pars posters, et ima carina .

Tribula grana terunt ; tribali nocuere novali.Spondet vas (cadis) , at vas (oasis ) continet escam .

Vas caput, atnummos tantum p ra s pra stat anucé .

Si transue vélis maris undas, utere ve'

lis .

ELEGORUM EXEMPLA(QUl ET vansus msmonu tas sun'

r) .

Fas, sed ante vidé qui f idit, nec benevidit,Fallitur : ipse vi

’

dé ne capiaref i’

de'

.

Forfiee sartores, tonsoresforp ice gaudent ;A t faber ignitum forcipe prensat Opus.

Consortes fortuna eadem , socios labor idem ,

Unum colleg as efficit officium

At earos faciunt schola, Indus, mensa,’

sadoles

Sulcus agri lira est : dat lyra tacta modos.

Ne sit secaras , qui nonest tutus ab hoste ;Ad flumenripas, ad mare littas babes .

Sunt a tate senes ; veteres v ixere priores

Quod nonest simulo dissimuloque quod est.

Ungula conculcat ; lacerat, tenet, armpit unguisUlva tenax stagno nascitur, alg a mari.

Vollamus proprie castra, at sep imus ovile,Hasta teres dici, spha ra rotunda potest.

Quod scriptum est dele, sed fiammam exstingue lucerna ;Lingua cibum gustat, qui bene cunque sap it.

Est incarne cutis,detracta e corpore p ellis ;

Terg um pandit homo ; bella a tergus habet.

Pistor habetfurnum ; fornace hypocausta calescuntHa c nb

'

ta Gramm atlci nonmih1 nOta fuit.Anne nb

’

vi quid babes ? A lium te : nil ego no

Quod m inimereffertgarrulus i le réffert.Si naforte s ides, atque est tibi commoda series ,1 12.scale

”

s‘

édé ; fOrs nova tuta parum est.

TRANSLATIONS

0 ? TH !

LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES.

Poema, a p oem, n.Mare, a sea , 11.

Leo , a lion, m .

Natio, a nation, f.Caro , flesh,Ordo , order,

Virgo, a virg in, f.H omo , a man, c.

Nem o , no man, c .

Turbo , a whirlwind, m .

Ligo , a sp ade, m .

Macedo . a Macedonian, m .

Lac , milk, 11. SO], the sun, m .

IVIel, honey, n. Fel. ga ll, n.

R én, the kidney , m .

Sinddn,fine linen, f.Halcydn, a kingfi sher, f.Lum en, light, 11 .Pecten, a comb, m.

Calcz‘

ir, a sp ur, n.

J ubar, a sunbeam, n.Par, a pa ir, 11. Far, meal, 11 .

Career, a p rison, m .

Ver, sp ring , 11 .

Pater, a father, m .

Imber, a shower, m.

Iter, a journeg , n.

Latbr, a brick, m .

H onbr, honour, m .

A rbdr, a tree, f.

ZEquOr, a smooth surface ( se a ) , 11 .

Marm br. marble ( sea) , 11.Cor, the heart, 11.

Fulg ii r, lightning. n.

Eb ii r, ivory, n.lccfir, the liver, 3

FEtas. ag e, f,

V515 , a vessel, h .

Vas,a surety, m .

Mas, a ma le, m .

A s , a p ound, m .

Gigas, a g iant, m .

Elephas, anelephant. m .

A dam as , adamant, m .

Nubes, a cloud, f.

M iles, a sold ier, c.

H ospes, a host, or guest, 8 .

Satelle’

s, a body-guard, c

M erges, a sheaf; f.Segé

'

s, stand ing corn, f.

Interp res, an interp reter, c ,.

Teges, a ma t, f. Quiés , rest. f.Obsés , a hostage, c .

Pra sés, a president, 0 .

Pés, a foot, m . Mercés, hare, t

H erés, anheir, c.

E s, copp er, n.

Pra s, a surety, m .

Avis, a bird, f.

Ammis, a river, m.

Lapi s, a sto ne, m .

Cass‘

i s, a helmet, f.

T igris , a tiger, c.

Cin‘

i s, a shes , m .

Pulvi'

s, dust, m . Lis, strife, flSamni s, a Samnite, m .

Quiri s, a R oman, m ,

Di s, Pluto, m .

Sangu‘

is,blood, m .

G li s, a dormouse, m.

DOS, at dowry, f

COS, a whetstone, f.

SacerdOs , a priest, or priestes s , 6 .

F165, a flower, m .

l4~o TR ANSLATIONS OF THE

(Neutra) Neuter Nouns (qua exeunt) which end (in at,

a r, e

, ) in a l,a r , and e, (gaudent) prefer (fingere) to form

(i Singularis A blativi ) i inthe A blative Singular, ( ia Pluralis Nom inativi) and ia in the .Nom inative Plural. (H isexcepta sunt) From these are excepted (ino r) the follow ingin a r : baccar, a hind of p lant ; nectar, necta r ; jubar, a

sunbeam far,cornor mea l.

(Qua efferunt) Those which form (ium pro um) iuminstead of am (Plurali Genitivo) inthe Genitive case Plural

(sunt) are, l . (i formantia Ablativo) Nouns form ing i intheA blative Singular ; 2 . (non crescentia Genitivo ) Nouns notincreasing inthe Genitive case ; 3. (pleraque) most Nouns

(in a: vel s ) ending ina: or s (positis post consonantem ) follow ing a consonanta‘e 4. (cum aliis Monosyllabis) w ith other

Nouns of One Syllable ; m as, a ma le ; mus, a mouse ; nix,snow nox

,night os, gen. ossis, a bone ; cos

,a whetstone

sal, sa lt ; 501, the sun; cor, the heart ; pax, p eace glis, a

dormouse lis, strife ; (et) and dos, a dowry . (His excipi

enda sunt) From these must be excepted (qua um libenterefferunt) the follow ing , which prefer to form um : vates

,a

p rop het, p rop hetess, p oet, or p oetess senex,an old man;

pater, a fa ther panis, brea d ; (et) and accipiter, a hawk ;

(et) and canis, a dog ; frater, a brother ; mater, a mother ;juvenis

,a youth ; (et sa pins) and generally apis, a bee ;

volucris, a bird. 1'

70. (Viri) Names ofMen, (Populi) names of Peoples,

(et) and (Divi) names of Gods, (Venti) names of Winds,(Menses) names of Months

, (Montes) names of Mountains,

Many nouns in us either take or reject i in Gen. PL, as, parens ,

parentium , o r parentum . So all Present Participles.Nouns inas atis, is itis, ax ac is , ix, i cis, often form Gen. PI. inium ;

as c ivitas , c ivitatium .

Several m onosyllables and other nouns of th is Declensionfluctuate inthe formationof the Gen. PI and the student m ust observe the usage

ofw riters.

A ll A djectives follow ing the 8d Decl. form A ce . Sing . M asc . incm.

Parisyllab ic adjectives form Abl. Sing . in i ; as , tristis, tristi ; impari

syllables ini or e ; and of these, Partic iples and Com paratives prefer e

others i , except a few w h ich take e as d ives , pauper, sospes, superstes.

A djectives of th is Declens ion form Nom . Pl. Neut. in ia , except the

Com paratives, and vetus, vetera. And those w h ich form Nom . in in

form G en. Pl. inium, except celer, dives , inops , pauper, and som e others.

Memot, uber, degener, have no Neut. PL, and form Gen. Pl. inmm.

LATIN RULES A ND EXAMPLES. 1411

(R ivi) names of R ivers, (sunt) are (Generis Masculini) ofthe Masculine Gender. (Planta ) Names of Plants, (Diva )nam es of Goddesses, (Fem ina ) names of Women, (Terra )names of Countries , (Urbes) names ofCities, (Insula ) names

of Islands, (sunt, are (Generis Feminini) of the Fem inine

Gender. (Vox indeelinabilis) Any undeclinedWord (est)is (Neutrius Generis) of the Neuter Gender. (Sunt) Thefollow ing are (Communis Generis) of the Comm onGender

civis, a citiz en; hostis, anenemy juvenis, a young p ersontestis, a w itness ; judex,

a judge ; artifex, ana rtiz an auctor,

anauthor ; exsul, anexile Op ifex anartifieer ; comes, a

comp anion; heres, anheir ; hospes, a guest or host ; dux,a leader ; obses, a hostage ; interpres, an interp reter con

iux, a husband or w ife ; incola, an inhabitant ; sacerdos, a

p r iestor p riestess ; v index,anavenger adolescens, a young

man or woman; infans, an infant ; index, an informer :

parens, a p a rent ; pra sul, a p resident ; par, a ma te ; custos,

a gua rdian; municeps, a burgess satelles, a body-

gua rd ;

bos, anor or cow ; m iles, a soldier ; vates, a seer or p oet ;augur, a soothsayer ; grus, a c rane ; canis, a dog ; tigris, a

tiger serpens, a serp ent sus, a sw ine (jungimus) we add

dama, a deer ; talpa, o rnole.

‘

l‘

7 1. (A et c) Words ending m a and e (sunt) are

(Fem inina) Fem inine ; (as et es) words ending inas and es

(sunt) are (Masculina) Masculine.

(Masculorum nom ina ina ) The names ofMales ending ina

(sunt) are (Masculina ) Masculine (ut) as, nauta or nav ita,a sa ilor ; verna, a slave borninhis master

’

s house ; (et) andpoeta, a p oet ; scurra, a bufl

'

oon scriba, a nota ry ; (et) andpropheta, a p rop het.

v Winds follow the Gender of ventus, month s of m ensis, mountains 01mons , rivers of flovius, plants of arbor. Som e rivers are Fem . , as Styx,Lethe , Allia . Many nam es of Mountains are Fem . , as Ossa , (Eta, ZEtna,Rhodope , Alp es, &c . ; som e Neuter, as Soracte , Pelion. Some nam es

of Plants are Masculine , as oleaster, a w ild olive som e Neuter, as siler,a withy. Som e nam es of Cities are Masculine , as Sulmo , Selinus ; andthose ini , as Delph i, Vei i ; some Neuter, as T ibur, Anxur, Tarentum .

Praneste .

1' Those nam es of Anim als w hich are found in only one gender are

called Ep icoena ; and the w ords mas or fem ina must be used w henit isnecessary to distinguish the sex : as Masc. passer, a spa rrow passer fe

m ina. a. hen-sp a rrow ; Fem . vulpes, a for ; vulpes m a s o r mascula, a dog

LATIN RULES AND nxanrw s. 145

a po rch acus,a needle Idus, the Ides ina Roman; month

(atque) and manus, a hand ; tribus, a tribe murus, a daugh

ter-in-law soorus, a mother-ia -law anus, anold woman.

77. (InseresFem ininis) Y ou will place amonr Fem inine words (Nom ina Quinta ) Nouns of the Fifth Declension

(ines) ending ines .

Dies, a day, (est) is (inSingulo) inthe Singular Number

(mas) Masculine (vel) or (Fem ininum) Fem inine ; (inPluraliNumero) in the Plural Number (semper) always (Masculi

num) Masculine.

78 . (Singularis Numerus) The Singular Number

(deest) is w anting (multis Nominibus) to many Nouns (ut)as, manes, the Sp irits of the dead ; loculi, a p urse penates,household deities ; cuna ,

a cradle ; therma , wa rm ba th s ;

nuga , trifles grates, thanks arma,a rms viscera, bacoels

magalia, cottages ; (cum deum Festis) w ith Festivals of the

gods, (ut) as, Floralia, thefestiva l ofFlara .

le

The follow ing is a further list of Substantives wanting the SingularNumber :

FIR ST DECLENSION.

M ina , threats .

M inutia , deta ils .

Nundina , market-day.

Nuptia , a bridal.

Pli alera , horse-trapp ings .

Prestig ia ,jugglery.

Prim itia , firstfruits.Quisquilia , rubbish.

Reliquia , remnants.

Salebra , roughnesses.

Selina , a sa lt-work.

Scala , a sta ircase.

Scopa , a besom .

Tenebra , da rkness .

Trica , intrica cies , trifles .

Angustia , stra its.

A rgutia , refinements.

Biga , a chariot and pa ir.

Clitella , p anniers.Delicia , deli ght, da intiness.Divitia , riches.

Epula , a feast.Excubia , a night watch.Exequia , a funeral.Exuvia , spoils.

Facetia , p leasantries.

_Feria , a holiday.

UH abena , reins.

Inducia,a truce.

Inferiae, of erings to the dead.

Insidia , anambush. Valva , folding-doors.Lap idicina , a sto ne quarry. Vindicia , a cla im, defence.

Also Calenda , the Calends ; Nona , the Nones of a month AthenaTheba , Syracusa , w ith other towns.

SECOND DECLENSION.

(a) Masculine.

Inferi, the Gods below.Cancelli, a lattice,Liben, children.Cani, white ha irs.

Codicilli, writing tablets.

Fasti, annals .

Fori, the hatches .

Posteri, posterity.

Superi, the Gods above.

146 TRANSLATIONS onTHE

(Malta) Many Substantives (qua ) which (carentP lurali )are destitute of a Plural Number (apparent) appear (leotitantibus) to students.

(Nonnulh'

Casus) Some Cases (absunt h is) are wanting tothese Nouns : fas, right ; frugis, fruit ; dapis, a feast opis,help vis, force (et) and (multa) many Nouns (pra terha c) besides these (apparent) appear, (qua ) which (carenttare destitute of (Casibus nonnullis) some CasesT

(b) Neuter.

Bellaria, da inties. Lamenta, lamentations .Crepundia, toys . Munia, duties .

Cunabula, a cradle. Pra cordia, the midr zfilExta , entra ils. Tesqua, wild p la ces.

J usta, funera l ofi'

erings .

Also names of People and Places, as Volsci, Delph i, Leuctra, &o

TH IR D DECLENSION.

(a) Ma sculine and Fem inine.

Antes. the rows of vines .Fores, a door.

.

Cervices, the neck (also sing. in Lemures, goblins.

poetry). Majores, ancestors .Coelites , the Gods above. M lnores, p osterity.

Fides, a late (also s ing. inpoetry). Proceres. nobles .

Also names of People, Places , & c . , as Brigantes, Cyclades,

Neuter.

Brevia, shallows. Ma nia, city walls .

FOURTH DECLENSION.

A rtus, limbs. Idus, the Ides.

Among the m any w ords wh ich are not used inthe Plural Number,notice ( l ) Materialia : as, aurum , gold ; argentum , s ilver ; lac, milk

sanguis , blood . (2 Abstracta : as, letum , death senectus, old age

fames, hunger ; p ietas, p iety. (3) Collectiva : as, vulgus, the common

peop le supellex, furniture. (4) And the follow ing aer, the a tmosphere ;

nether, the sky humus, the ground ; pontus, pelagus, the sea ; tellus, earth

serum. time ver, spring vesper, evening .

f Nouns defective inCase are num erous . Those having only one caseina Number are called Monoptota ; those having two , Diptota ; three ,Triptota, 8 m.

( 1 ) Many Nouns have only the Nom . and Accus. in one or both

Numbers

(a ) Greek Neuters in03 inS1ng . and Plur. , as m elos , melé .

(b) Fas , nefas, instar, nihil, necesse, opus (need) , inSing . only, havingno Plur.

148 TRANSLATIONS or THE

redundant in Cases (ut) as, domus, a house ; laurus, a

laurel ; (Edipus, Qi’

dip us .

*

Declensionof Domus :

Plural.

Nom . Domus. domus.

G en. Dom fis. domuum or domorum.

Dat. Domui. dom ibus.

A cc . Domum . domus or domos .

Abl. Don1u or domo . dom ibus .

The Gen. Dom i 18 used to signify athome , as, dom i mea . at my home .

Laurus, cupressus, colus, ficus,o

p inus, follow the 2d Dec lens ion, butalso take from the 4th the Cases in us and u ; (Edipus, Gen. (Ed1podisand (Edipi. There are many Substantives w ith a two-fold Declension;as , juventa and juventus vespera and vesper, eri (w hich form s Ab]. ves

pero , vespere,’

or vesperi) duritia and durities, &c. Many Adjectiveshave also double form s , as bijug us and bijug is .

Vas makes Gen. PI. vasorum , Dat. vas is . So anciliorum from anc ile,a shield. Greek Nouns in ma , Gen. tis, have Dat. Pl. tis as, poem a,

Dat. Pl. poematis

T he follow ing Substantives change their signification in the Plural

NumberSing .

JEdes , a’

temp le

Aqua, water

Auxilium , helpBonum , a good ;

Career. a p rison

Castrum , a fortCera, wax

Com itium , the Assembly-place

C0p ia, p lentyEpulum , a sacred feast;Facultas, a facultyFinis, anend

Fortuna, fortune ;

Gratia, favourHortus, a garden

Impedimentum , a hindrance

Littera, a letter of the alphabet

Ludus, p lay ;Lustrum , a term offive yearsNatalis, a birthd ayO pera, exertionOp is ( Gem) , helpPars , a portionRostrum, a beak ;

Sal, salt ;

fabuln. a btiui d ;

a des, a house.

aqua , med i cinal spr ings.auxilia, auxiliary forces .

bona, goods , ej'

ects.

carcéres, a sta rtiw-pla ce.

castra, a campcera , a waxentablet

Com itia, the Assembly at Rome

copia , forces.epula , a banquet.

facultates, means.

fines, boundaries .

fortuna , t he g ifts of fortune. a fortune.

gratia , thanks.

horti, a pleasure-garden.

impedimenta , baggage.

littera , anep istle, or literature.

ludi, public games.

lustra, la irs of wild beasts.natales, orig in.

Opera , workmen.

Opes, p ower, wealth.

partes,~a part ina p lay.

rostra, the pulp itfor speaking in the

Roman for um (adorned with the

beaks of cap tured ship s).sales, wit.

tubule . writing tablets.

LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 149

5 (Verb'

orum prima c onjugatio) the first conjugationof verbs, (cui o, as, a re, terminatio) the term ination of

which is o, a s, are, (fit avi inPerfecto) becomes inthe Preterperfect Tense avi (subjicit atum Supino) and makes its

Supine end in'

a tum.

(Hinc excipienda su‘nt) From this rule must be excepted

(quae efi'

erunt) verbs which form (ui itum) ui in the Preter

perfect, and itum inthe Supine.

Present. Preterp .

crepo, I utter a so und 3 crepui,cubo, I lie down cuba i,sono , I sound sonui,dom o, I tame domui,veto , Iforbid veta i

,

tono , I thunder tonui,

Seco , I cut secui,

frico , 1 rub fricui,

J uvo , [ help jfivi,Java , I wash lavi,

(et vindicat) and it takes also lavatum.

Do , I g ive dedi, datum.

sto , I stand steti, statum .

M ico , I glitter, (dat Perfectum m icui) makes its Preterperfect

m icui ; Plico , Ifold (dat Perfectum plicu1) makes its Preterperf'

ect

p licui ; (M ico fert) m ico takes (nullum‘

sup inum ) no sup ine ;

(atum dat vel itum Plico) Plico makes plicatum or plic itum .

80. (Vérborum altera conjugatio) the second conjugationofVerbs, (cui eo, es, Ere, terminatio) the term inationof

which is eo, es, th e, (fit ui inPerfecto) becomes inthe Preter

perfect Tense ui, (subjicititum Supino) and makes its Supineend initum.

(Hinc excipiefida Sunt) From this rule must be excepted

(quae efferunt) Verbs Wh ich form (out, etum) evi inthe Preterperfect, and etum inthe Supine ; (ut) as,

Present. Preterp.

neo , 1 sp in nevi,deleo , I blot out delevi,

(Adde h is) Add to these

fleo , I weep flevi,

p leo , Ifi ll ; p levi,

oleo , I grow ;“

olevi,

(cum Cbmpos itis) w ith f their compounds.

Translate et, atque, ac , a nd dat, facit, format, efii c it, make: sus

:ip it, vindicat, takes fit, becomes ,stat, stands .

1 Abo leo , Sup . abolitum : ado leo (or ado lesco ) , Sup . adultum.

150 TRANSLATIONS or THE

(His) In the follow ing , (Perfectum) the Preterperfect .

Tense (stat indi) stands indi (sum Supinum terminat) theSupine ends insum

Present.

prandeo , I d inesédeo , I s itvi deo , I see

( Sed ) But,spondeo , I p romise ; spbpondi, sponsum.

tondeo , I shear ; tbtondi, tonsum .

mdrdeo , 1 bite m bmo rdi, morsum .

pendeo , I hang pependi, p ensum

(His) In the follow ing (Perfectu’

m) the Preterperfect

Tense (fit) is formed (insi) insi, (sum Supinum exigit) the

Supine requires sum

Present.

jubeo , I commandmulceo , I soothe ;

(Itidemque ) and sim ilarly,mulgeo , I m ilktergeo, I wip eardeo , I burnrideo , I laughsuadeo , I p ersuademaneo , I rema in;haereo , I stick ;

(Sic et) 80 also ,

algeo , I am chill

fulgco , I shine( Item ) also ,

urgeo , Ip ush ursi.

(Sed ) But (his) in these (Supinum) the Supine (deficit) isw anting.

(Dant si et tum) These two make the'

Preterperfect insi,and the supine intum

Present.Indulgeo , I indulge ;torqueo , I twist,

Sed (But) ,A ugeo, I increase ; auxi, auctum.

frigeo, I am cold ; frixi,

(dant) make luxi.

( Sed) But (nongenerant) these three latter do not form ( Su

p inum ) a Sup ine.

(R is e) The follow ing (volunt) w ill have (vi sufii ci) vi tobe added (Perfecto) to the Preterperfect Tense, (tum Supine )and tum to the Supine :

.5Q TRANSLATIONS or THE

Present.duce , I lead

sugo , I suck

rege , I rule ;veho , I carry

Sco jubet) Seo desires (vi subjlci) ‘

vi to end (Perfecto )Preterperfect, (tum Supine ) and tum its Supine : (ut) as,

Present. Sup ine .

cresce , I grow cretum .

suesce , I am ha bituated ; l uetum .

quiesco . I rest ; quietum.

nosco , I know netum .

pasco , Ifeed pastum.

compesce , I restra inpesco, I requiredisco. I learn;Ice , I strike ictum .

v inco , I conquer victum.

linque , I leave lictum .

Parco , I spa re parsum .

Sparge , I sprinkle sparsum.

merge , I dip mersum.

terge , I wipe tersum .

Ago , I do egi , actnm .

(range , I break freg i, fractum.

tango , I touch tet‘

ig i, tactum .

pango , I covenant pep‘

i g i, pactum

(sed Composta ) but its Com pounds mak’

e -pegi ,

-p actum.

punge , Ip rick pupugigl: punctum.

junge , Ijoin junxi, junctum.

lege , I read or gather l'

e'

gi, lectum

(cempe situm ) whencompounded (seepé lexi dat) it often formslexi.§Present.

Fige , Ifixhuge , Iframep ingo , Ip a int ;stringe , I tie

(Do jubet) Do requires (si suffici) si te be Jemed (Perfecto)to its Preterperfect, (sum Supine) and sum to its Supine :

Of its compounds, agnosco makes Sup . agnitum ; cognosce , cognitum .

1“ Comparce , comparsi.

1 Compounds of punge make Preterp . punxl.Of the compounds of lege , I gather, dilige forms dilexi ; intelligo

intellexi negligo, neg lexi. The others form leg i, as collige collegi ; so

do the compounds of lege, I read, as perlege , perleg i .

LATIN, RULES AND EXAMPLES. 153

Present.la'do , I hurt

(Verum ) But,cede , I yield cessum.

( Sic ) So ,illi do , I beat o n illisi,divide , I divide divisi,

(Flecte) Form ( vertendo) by changing (do indi) do intodi (qum exeunt) these whi ch end (in ando, endo) in andoendo .

’

Present.

pendo , I weightendo . 1 stretch

(tamen) but,finde , I clea ve ; fi di,sc indo , I cut sei di,funde , I pour ffi di,tundo , I hammer tutfidi,cudo , Ifa shion cudi,cade , I fall cec

‘

i di,caede, I beat or kill cecidi,ede , I eat ; edi,

A bdo,I hide ; adde, I add ; condo, I store up credo, I

trust , ebdo, I block up , perde, I lose ; redde, I restore

ede, I utter ; prede, I betray ; trade, I deliver , vendo; Isell , dedo, I gi ve up ; (ques) which (composta sunt a do) arecompounded of do, I g ive ,

-didi, -ditam, efi'

erunt) formd idi

,-ditam (ut) as ,Present.

ede ,dedo,

flecte , I bendnecte , I twine

pecto , I comb

pete , I seek

mete; I mow

mitto , 1 sendverto, I turn versum .I

(Verbum) A verb (qued fit a siste) which is formed fromsisto (sutficit -st

‘

iti Perfecto) joins to its Preterperfect -stiti

83. (So, sivi, sitam, fit) So makes s ivi, situm (sicformatur) thus is formed

A s scando , scandi, scansum ; defendo, defendi, defensam.

1 A lso , nexni, pexui.

1: Sterte , 1 snore, stertui.

TRANSLAT'

IONS OF THE

Present.arcesse , I send forlacesse , I p rovoke

VISO , I visit

p inse , I pound p insui, p istum .

§ 84. Texe , I weave, (stat) ~ stands (unum inwe) theonly verb inwe , (qued vindicat) whi ch takes texui, textum .

85. Lo,tui

,tum (sic fiectitur) thus is formed

Present.Censulo , I consultocculo , I hide

( Sed ) But,celo , I cultivate colui,m ole , I grind ; m olui,

(A cello verba cellui) Verbs compounded from cello, I

imp el, make cellui (sed) but (conjugabis) you w ill form,

Present. Preterp . Supine.

percelle , I strike perculi, perculsum.

pello , I dr ive pep i’

i li, pulsum .

vello,‘

I pluck velli and vulsi, vulsum .

fallo , I deceive fefelli, falsum .

psallo , »

,I sing or p lay p salli,

sallo, I salt salsum .

Telle, I ra ise, (formatem) formed in the Preterperfect

sustuli, (fit) becomes (inSupine ) inthe Supine sublatum.

(Mo, mui, mitum fit) mo forms mui, mitum (ut) as,

Present. Preterp .

fremo , I bellow fremui,

geme , I grean gemui,tremo, I tremble tremui,

( Sup ine carens) Which has no sup ine.

come, I deck com si,

promo , I produce promsi,

( Sic flectuntur) Scare formed,

sumo , I take sumsi,demo, I take away demsi,

( Sed) But,emo , I buy

prem o, I press

(Latini) Latinwriters (seepe ponunt p ) often interpose p(inter m et 3 vel t) betw eenm and s or t (Sic fiunt) Thusare formed sumpsi, dempsi, demptum, comptum , premptum,

sumptum , emptum ,

Also p insum.

TRANSLATIONS or THE

(Tamen) but,Present.

Flue, Iflewstrue , I build

vive , I live

stinguo, I quench ,

88. (Verborum quaro

ta conjugatio) the fourth conjugationofVerbs, (cui ia , is , i re, terminatio) the term ination of

which 1S io, is, i re, (fit) becomes (inPerfecto) m the Preter

perfect T ense ivi, (Supine i tam sufficit) and makes its Su

pine end m itum.

Present. Preterp.

Sancio , I ratify sanxi,

(nec respuit) nor does it reject sancivi, sancitum.

vincio , I bind vinXi,fulcio , Ip rop fulsi,

sarc io, I darn sarsi,

farcie, I stufi“ fars i,

am ic io , I clothe am icui,salio , I dance ,

salui or saln,A t (but)singultio , I sob

sepelio , I buryvenie , I come

venco, I am

sep ie , Ifence inaperio , I op en

comperio, [ find outreperio , Ifindhaurio, I dra in;sentie , I perceive

89. (Flexeris) Y ou must form (Deponentia) DeponentVerbs (ex regulis) according to the rules (A ctivorum) ofA ctive Verbs : (nam ) for (Praeteritum Passivum) the Preterperfect Passive (est) is (Derivati

'

vum) a Deri vativeSupini) of the Supine.

Present.

( 1. Reer, I think ,ratus sum

m isereor, I p i ty ; m isertus sumJtfateor, I confess ; fassus sum :

(fiecte sis ) form -flessus lnCompesitis) zfessus inthe Compounds.

Labor, Ifall , lapsus sum .

utor, I use usus sum .

Only known1nits com pounds distinguo, extingue .

Veneo i s from venum eo , as vendo from venum-do.

Also m iseritus sum .

LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 157

Present. Preterp .

loque r, I speak leonte s sum.

seque r, Ifollow secutus sum .

nite r, I str ive , nisus , or nixus, sum.

irascor, I am angry iratus sum .

querer, I compla in; questus sum .

g radior, I step ; gressus sum .

vatier, I sufi'

er passus sum :

(et) and -pessas inCompositis ) -p essa s inits Compounds

ulciscor, I avenge ; ultus sum .

ap iscor, I a cquire aptus sum .

( Sed ) butadip iscor, I acquire adeptus sum .

proficiscor, I go profectus sum .

experg iscor, I awake experrectus sum .

obliviscor, Iforget oblitus sum .

comm iniscor, I imag ine comm ente s sum .

(Sed) butnanciscor, Ifind nactus sum .

paciscor, I covenant pectus sum .

morier, I d ie mortuus sum .1’

nascor, I am born; natus sum .

orior, I arise ertus sum . 1(Queis Futura) The Future Participles of which last three Verbs

are moriturus, nasciturus, oriturus .

(Quartae) of the fourth conjugation,Present.

Metlor, I measure

ordior, I begin

At (but)experior, I try expertus sum.

opperior, I waitfor ; eppertus sum.

90. (Flexeris) You must conjugate (Inceptiva) Inceptive Verbs (dueta a Verbis) derived from Verbs (ut Primitiva) as their Primitives ; (sic) thus

Present. Preterp.

exardesco, I beginto bla z e ; exarsi (from ex, ardee ) .obsolesce , I grow out of da te obsolevi from obs, oleo) .trem isco, I beg into tremble tremui (from tremo ) .rescisco, I beg into know rescivi (from sc io ) .

Comm iniscor, and rem iniscer (w hich has no Sup ine) , are Cour

pounds of anobsolete verb meniscor.

Morie r, Infin. mori, and som etimes meriri .

i Orior is partly declined after the 3d Conjugation, partly after the

4th . Pres. Orior, oréris , or‘

itur, orimur, 850. But Infin. Oriri ; Imperf.Conj . Orirer.

Se Potier, I obta in. Pres. Potier, potiris and potéris, pet‘

itur and

pet‘

i tur, &c. Imperf. Subj. Poti rer and potérer, potireris and potéreris.850. Preterp . Poti tus sum. Infin. Potiri.

TRANSLATIONS OF THE

(Ui terminus) Ui is the term ination (Perfecto) to thePreterperfect (factorum) of those formed (ex Nominibus)from Nenns (Sic) thus,

Present. Preterp .

evanesce , I vani sh evanui (from e , vanns) .c onsanesco, I get well consanui (from cum , sanus) .

(Plurima) Very many (carent Supinis) have no Supines ;(multis) inmany (Perfecta) Preterperfects (nonapparent) donot appear.

*

(I4 iexeris) you must form (Impersonalia) ImpersonalVerbs (ex regulis) ac cording to the rules (Personalium ) of

Personals.

Present. Prete rp

pudet. it shames

peenitet, it repentsBut,

m iseret, it afiects with p ity ; m isertum est ;liliet, itplea ses ; libuit and libitum est.

taedet, it wearies p ertzesum est and twduit.

p iget, it irks p ig i tum est and p iguit."(In operibus Latinis) in Latin works (apparent) ap

pear (lectitantibus) to readers (multa Verba) many Verbs

The follow ing are the only Inceptive Verbs which have Sup inesAbolesco , adolesce , obsolesce , exolesco , coalesce , congelasco , exardesco , concup isco, convalesco , indo les

co , obdormisco, inveterasco ,

scisco , revivisco .

The follow ing have ne ither Sup ine nor PreterperfectE gresco , arboresce , albesco , ditesco , dulcesco , grandesco, hebesco ,herbesco , ignesco, incurvesco , juvenesco , m itesco, m ellesco ,

p inguesco, p lumesco, puerasco , silvesco , sterilesco, teneras ce,fatisco , augesco ,

hisco, labasco, renidesco .

Most of the others have Preterperfects, butno Supines.Or puditum est.

1Or m iseritum est.

Also w rittenlubet. Its compound is collibet, cellibuit, and collibi

tum es t.

[i Add also licet, it is lawful, licuit and licitum est.

Pudet and licet have the Active Future Participles, puditurus , lic i

turus . Padet, p iget, peenitet, have G erunds and Passive Participles indue, pudendi, &c . , p igendi, & c . , peenitendi, 850.

Many Verbs have the 3d Person Singular used impersonally : as, de

lectat and juvat, it delights ; constat, it is acknowledged ; praastat, it is

better ; restat, it rema ins ; apparet, it appears ; accidit, centing it, it happens suflicit, it is enough evenit, it comes to p a ss expedit, it is exp edient

tonat, it thunders ; pluit, it ra ins an’numerous others .

160 TRANSLATIONS onTHE

fasten salio, I dance or leap statue,I decree (atque) and

tango, I touch ; capio, I take ; rap io, I sna tch sapio, I am

w ise ; facio, I do ; jacie, I ca st ; lacio, I entice ; placeo, I

p lease taceo, I am silent.

(Excepta) The follow ing are excepted perage , I perform

perplaeeo, I p lease thoroughly (et) and facio, I do, (m istumcum Adverbiis) compounded w ith A dverbs.

(Convertito) Change (a in u) a into u (ex) in Verbscompounded of caleo, I tread ; salto, I dance ; quatio, I

(Converteris) You must change (e ini) e into i (horum in

comp . abigo , adigo , exige , tran51go , ambige . But cir

cumago , perage , satago-eg i, -actnm ) .

acci do , cono‘

i de ,'

dec‘

i do, excide , inci do, occ‘

idr

proc‘

ido : (midi , -cusum ).acc ino, concino , occ ino, praacino, recine . succino

(cinui, -centum ) .Frango confringe , difi

‘

ringo , eifringo, infringe , perfringe,

praefringo , refringe : -fregi, -fractum ) .adh ibee , exhibeo , inhibeo, perhibeo , prohibeo . B

'

ut

posthabeo .

deliteo .

confiteor, profiteor, difliteor: -fessus) .comp inge , imp inge , opp inge : -

pegi , -pactum ).But repango.

adsilio . So c ircum silio , desilio , dissilio, exsilio,insilio , praesilio , prosilio , resilio, subsilio , transilio -silui or -silii, -sultam ) .

constituo, destituo , instituo, restituo, substituo.

attingo , contingo , pertingo : -tigi,

.

o tactum ) .accip io, concip io,

o

decipio, excip io, incipio , perc ip io

praacipie , recip i o , suscip io : -cep i, -ceptum )abrip io , arrip io, corrip io, deripio, dirip io, er1p io,

praerip io, prorip io, surrip io’

: -ripui, -reptum ).desipio, resipisco.

afiicie , confic io, deficio, eflicio , inficio, perficio,feci, -fectum ) .

But benefacio, malefacio : (feci, factum ).abj

O

icio, adjicio, conjn

icio, disjicio, ejicio , injicie , oh

jicio, projicio, reji ci o, subjicie , transjicio : ( grad ,

jectum ) .allicio, elicio , illicie , pellicio.

’

displiceo . But perplaceo, complaceo.

conticeo, reticeo.

comp. conculco , inculco , proculco .

adsulto, exsulto , insulto, resulto.

decutio , discutio , excutio, incutio, perentie ,neutro,succutio -cussi, -cussum ).

LAT IN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 16 1

Compesitis) inthe Compounds of the follow ing Verbs : egeo,I want ; tence , I hold ; (atque) and emo, I buy ; specie, I

spy sedco, I sit ; (atque) and premo, I p ress ; (adde) adddedi, I gave ; (atque) and lege , I gather ; (adde) add steti,I stood ; (atque) and rego, I rule.

*

(Sunt excepta) The follow ing are excepted : relego, Ir ead aga in perlego, I read through (et) and praelego, Iread p ublicly .

(Si) If (mutate Simplici) the Simple Verb being changed

(.Composti Praesens) the'

Present T ense of the CompoundVerb (sumsit i) has takeni, (sumet 6) it w ill take e

“

(inPerfecto) in the Preterperfect, (Si ) if (valet) it is able (fingere\to make the vowel (longum ) long (Sic) thus,

Present. Preterp.

deficio , I fa il ; defé c i.

p rojicio, I throw ; prejéci.

consp ic io , I behold ; conspéxi.

dirigo , I direct ; diréxi.

perge (per-rego ) , I proceed ; perréxi.

surge (sus-rego ) , I rise surréxi.

porrigo (pro-rego ) , I stretch porréxinj'

(Composta) The’

Compounds (a) from quaere, I seek caede,I bea t or kill (et) and (a) ,

from leede, I hurt ; (mutant)change (a ini) a into M

comp . indigeo .

attineo , contineo , detineo , distineo , obtineo, per

tineo, retineo , sustineo -tinui, -tentum ) .adimo , dirim e , exim e , interimo , perim e , redimo

-em i, -emtum ). But ceemo , dém e (for de-imo ).

adsp ic ie , consp icio , desp icie , disp icio , inspic io , per

sp ic io , prOSpicio , resp icio, susp icio-spexi,

-spectum ).Sedeo assideo , consideo , desideo, dissideo , insideo , obsideo ,

praesidco , resideo : -sedi , -sessum

Premo comprimo , deprimo , exprimo , imprimo, epprim o , .

p erprim o , reprimo , supprim e -pressi, -pressum ).

Lego , I collige , deligo , dilige , elige , intelligo, neg ligo ,

gather ligo . The Compounds of Lego , I read , keep e.

Rego corrigo , dirigo, erige , &c . ( rexi , -rectum).

1“ Th is rule applies only w here the Sim ple Verb has e in the Stem

syllable of the Preterperfect, as inthe exam ples g iven. Whenthe Stemvow el is not lengthened inthe Preterperfect, i is kept, as continui : also

whenthe Stem-vow el of the Simple Preterperfect is not e, as illisi.

I Queero : comp. acquire , conquire , disquiro , exquire , inquire , permm .

d o acc

qi do , conoi de , deci de , excide , inci do, occ ide,

praecido, recido , succi do.

164 TRANSLATIONS OF THE

93. A . I. Adjectives, Participles, and Pronouns , agree Withtheir Substantives in-g

’

ender,number, and case : as,Nofin’

end

go to lostwealth .

The-Substantive is -understood by Ellipse": as, Most shuntoi l.

(Sfipp

ly men.)euter Adjectives perform the-office of-Substantives as, Death

is last of-all thing s .

II. A -finite Verb agrees w ith its-Nominative-Case ln-numberand person: as, All vices war a g ainstnature.

Sometimes an-Infinitive, or some Phrase, is-put for the-Nom inative as

, To-lie is notmine. How long life is g oing -to-be, is anCertain.

The-Nominative of-Pronouns is-expressed,seldom : as, We-lean

always towards the-forbidden, and we-desire thing s-denied.

Unless it-avail‘

for-distinctionor emphasis : as, I exp elled hing s ;ye bring

-intyrants.Impersonal

-Verbs have not a-Nominative expressed : as, It-irhsand earnestly rep ents himself.The-Persons of-the-Verb sum (I am) oftenare-understood as,

Nothing (is) -good excep twhat (is) -honourable.

The-Infinitive sometimes is~put~after the-Nominative : as, Then

pious E neas beg an-to-tear-o the-robefrom-his-shoulders .

But the-Infinitive gener ly is-

put-after the-Accusative,

'

a-finiteVerb going-before : as, M env rep ort that

-Homer was blind.

III. The-Relative agrees w ith its-antecedent '

i' in-gender, num

ber, and person, but in-case it-is-construed w ith its-ownsentence

us, Thatis the-p leasantestfriendship , which resemblance of-charactershas-coupled.

B. A -Substantive, Singular inform butnot in-meaning, oftenhasa-Verb, an-Adjective, or a-Relative, plural as, Partload the-tables

with-viands . The Teg eatanyouth come-up slow"

to-the-succour.

Two or more singularNouns generally have an-Adjective, Verb,or R elative, plural : as, Hannibal and Philop cemen were tahen-ofl

ozson.

lehe-pluralVerb agrees generally w ith the-Nom inative ef-the-g

worthier Person but the-Adjective or Relative with the-Nounof

the-worthi er Gender.

The-First Personis worthier thanthe-Second, the Second thanthe-Third : as, If

’thon'and Tullia are-well, I and Cicero are-well.

Inthings having-life the-Masculine Gender is worthier thanthe

Feminine as, My (literally, to-me) father and mother are dead.

Ellipsis (ellipse) is a Figureo f Syntax wh ich leaves out some wordor w ords belong ing to the regular constructionof the Sentence .

1" The Antecedent of the R elative is that word or those words to which

the Relative is referred.

LATIN RULES"AND EXAMPLES. 165

But in things w ithout-life, the-Adjective or Relative w ill-bemost-fro uently in the-Neuter Gender : as, R iches, honour, g lory,are place withinyour-view. (literally, eyes .)Copulative Verbs

”, sum (I-am)fio (I-become) videor (I-seem)

vocor (L am -called) , w ith the-like, whether of-a Finite or InfinitiveMood, have the -same case on-either-side : as, A -long syllable p lacedafter a-short, is -called Iambus .

— I-um-achnowledg ed a-royal boy byestablished tokens .

- It-is -allowed you to-be happy

A -Verb, placed between two Nom inatives, sometimes agrees

with the-latter alone : as, The-qua rrels of-lovers are the-renewal

A -R elative placed betweentwo Substantives of-the-same thingf,

oftenagrees Wlth the-latter alone : as, Thebes, which is the-cap ital

of-Boeotia .

Te -a-Substantive, Pronoun, and sometimes to-a-Sentence,a-Substantive ef-the-same thing ):may be

-

put-in-Apposition in

the-same case : as, R iches , incentives of-evils , are-dug-out

earth) . We consuls are-wanting .- Let-him-reflect(that) an-orator

is -being formed, a-difiicultmatter.

Whentwo Substantives ef-difl'

erent things come-together, oneiS-put in the-Genitive-Case : as, R eclining under the-cover of-abeech-tree.

94. C I. Verbs Transitive govern an-Accusative of-thefnearer Object : as, Desp ise p leasures .

— Ia-the-first-p la ce, worship

SomeNeuter and Passive Verbs admit an-Accusative ef-their

own 0 eration§z as, He-serves a-hard slavery— Claudius p layed

haz ard?Some Verbs, especiall those

,

of-ashing and teaching , havdouble Accusative : as, lVe-all demand of-thee p eace.

— VVhy nowshould-I-teach thee letters, O-ass

Most of these-Verbs keep the-Accusative of-the-thing inthePassive Voice : as, She-delig hts to-be-taught Ionic movements .

The-Accusative of-respect in-the-Greek manner is-placed

-after

Neuter and Passive Verbs as-well as Adjectives : as, li e-quiverswith-his-ears and trembles in-his-limbs .

—(She is) all dyed with

redness in-her-tender cheehs . They-are naked as-to-their arms.

See § 10 1.1 That is, wh ich are both used to define the same personor th ing ;

as, Anim al and hom inem Thebae and caput.

t By a Substantive of the same thing is meant one w h ich eXpresses

the same personor th ing inanother character or by another title, for the

purpose of definitionor explanation.

Called the Cognate Accusativo

166 rrm sm rrorzs or run

These Prepositions governan-Accusative : Ante (before) , apud(at, wrth, among) , ad (to, at) , adversus (over-against, towards) , circum (around) , circa (around, about) , citra , cis (on-the-near-side-of) ,contra (ag ainst, ever trainst) , inter (between, among) ,(towards) , extra (out-o infra (beneath) , intra (w ithin) ,(near) , ob (on-account-of, before) , p enes (in-the ow er-of) , pone(behind) , p ost (behind, after, since) pra ter eside , beyond,except) , p rop e (near) , p ropter (on-account-of, nigh) , p er (through,by) , secundum (after, along, according to) , sup

ra (above) , versus

(towards) , ultra (beyond) , trans (across) . l‘

o-these add super

(above, over) , subter (beneath) , and in (into, towards, to, upon,ag ainst, sub (under, about) ifmotiontakes-place.

II. The-Vocative, the-Case of-one-called, is-governed byInterjectioneither expressed or understood : as, Son, or, 0 Son.

The-Interjections en and ecce (lo !) govern the-A ccusative andthe-Nominative ; 0 , ah, heu, hem, proh (alas) , the Accusative, theNominative, and the-Vocative as, Lo a -wretched manl— Lo a-newdisturbance and quarrel — Alas p itiable boy

-Alas humanemp tiness The-honour of-g ods and menforfend J up iter

Hei and vaz (alas !) govern a-Dative : as, Alas me wretched

Woe-to-thee, p leader .’

III. Almost all Adjectives and Verbs , also Adverbs and Substantives, governa-Dative of-the-remeter Object, fer-the-sake of

which something is or is-done as, We-wish to-be r ich not onlyforourselves .

-For—me ia-yon-place (there-is) neither sowing nor reapzng .

—Numa chose virg ins for Vesta .— For-the-city he-is a -father ,

andfor-the-city a -husband.

A ccordingly sum signifying possessively has a-Dative of-the-pos

sessor : as, For there-is to-me (1. e . I have) afather at-home ; there

is (i. e . I have) a -cruel stepmother.

Very-many Adjectives, Adverbs, and Verbs govern a-Dative,sometimes even Substantives, by which is-signified advantag e,communication, comparison, consecration, agreement, habit, help,and fitness, kindness, nearness, pleasantness, affinity, delivery,indulgence, demonstration, promise, trust, and narration, compli

ance, command, and whatever (is) contrary to-these ; together w ithw ho (I-marry) , vaco (I-am-at-leisure-for) : other-instances w ill

stand under the-First Rule : as, Let-him-be serviceable to-his

country, useful to-the-fields .—A -

poet is bordering -onnu-orator .

A-multitude burdensome to peace, and hostile to-quiet rest.

It-is p roper-to-live ag reeably to-nature.

-He-lends a -patient ear

to-cultivation. l’Vhat he-g ives to-another, he-tahes-from himself.

(He) a ssured this to-me, and p ersuaded (me of it) . —Fortune

guarantees safety tom s —Philosophy hea ls minds . We avour

thee.—I-um-wroth-with thee.

—The-conquermg s ide pleased the

168 TRANSLATIONS or THE

individuals are the-riches of-the-stf .te.— All-things which were the

“

:

woman’

s become the mans — Scip io mad e Spain of-Ramandomznum.

”st Impersonal is

-put

-before a-Genitive, if nature, token, oflice,or duty, is

-understood as, It-is (the-nature) of-any manto-err.

Ii - is (the-token) of-a -dishonest man to-deceive by-a -lie.—It-is (the

duty) of-a -

young-manto-reverence (his) elders (majores natu) .

An-Ellipse of-other Nouns also happens bef ore a-Genitive as,

Hector’

s Andromache. (supply wife.) — Glaucus’

s Deiphobe. (supplydaug hter .)— We-had-come to Vesta

’

s . (supply temp le.)— I-see thisman

’

s Byrrhia . (supply slave .)The-Personal Genitive concealed inthe-Possessive Pronountakes

another Genitive agreeing-w ith itself : as, The-commonwealth was

preserved by-the-exertion of-me alone.

-’

You-saw the-eyes of-mcweep ing .

The-Genitive of-Quality follow s Substantives : as, A-boy of-in

genuous countenance and ing enuous modesty. Quality is-put also in

the-Ablative as, An-old-manwith-long beard, with-rough hair.

Partitive words, Numerals, Comparatives, and Superlatives,

governa-Genitive, w ith-which they-agree in-gender : as,Many of

these trees were p lanted by-my ownhand.— I-um-charmed with-each

a/‘

-

you.— We-follow thee

,holy

-one of-g ods .— Sulla lost a-hundred

and-twenty of-his -men.—The-elder of-the-Neroes .

— Bravest of-theGauls . Of-mortals nobody is-wise at-all hours . Leastof-all.These Genitives, g entium, terrarum, and others, follow the

Adverbs of-Place, huc (hither) , eb (thither) , qub (whither) , ubi(where) and-the-like : as, I-think we-must-mig rate to-some-quarter

Adverbs and Substantives signiZing Quantity, also Neuter

Adjectives and Pronouns, govern a‘

enitive : as, Enough of-elo

quence, too-little qf wisdom.

- J ustice requires no reward.— He-p re

serves something of-his~ancient streng th.-As-much of-credit as of

money.

(These) govern a-Genitive —Verbal-Adjectives inax, some

Participles put Adjectively, and Adjectives signifying knowledge,care, and desire, memory, fear, crim ination, power, and thesewhich stand in-a-contrary sense ; the-poets give many others : as,

Time devourer of-thing s .—A -mind covetous of-another

’

s-pro erly,lavish of-his-own. The mind of-menis ignorant of-fat — All-menhate one or etful of-a-benefit.— Innocent of-a-brother

’

s blood.

Ang er is wit out-control of-itself. -O late in-your-studies.

Certain Verbs of-accus ing , acquitti

govern a-Genitive of-the-thing : as,

guilty) of ; folly.—Adverse circumstances

duties.

LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES .

Mem'

inz (I-remember) , recorder, reminisco'

r (I-recolleét) , ob-l

liviscor (I-forget) , govern sometimes a-Genitive, sometimes anA ccusative-case : as, God commands thee to-remember death.

Dying he-remembers sweetArg i .

M isereor,miseresco (I-pity) , are-joined to-a-Genitive ; as, Thou

pitiest us not-at-all. e

V. Adjectives, Verbs, and sometimes Substantives, admit anAblative signifying the-cause, or instrument, ormanner, ormaterial,or respect, or anv-soever limitation as,Dido wild with-horrid pur

poses .— The-bad hate to-sinfrom-fear of-punishment. —These strive

to -defend w ith-javelins , those with-stones . Wrong is-done ia-two

uiauners, by-violence or deceit. We-consist of-soul and body.

Ennius mig htiest in-g enius , untra ined in-art.— M ardonius, a-M ea'

e

by-nation.

—He-is notag ed, butyetalready advanced in-life.

Fung or (I-discharge), fruor (I-enjoy) , utor (I-use) , vescor

(I-eat) , governan-Ablative,p otier (I-gain) , an-Ablative or a-Geni~tive : as, I-will-discharg e the

-office of-a -whetstone.— IVhenhe-was

able to-use his-victory, he-chose-rather to-enjoy (it) .— The-Numi~

diansfeed-onwildflesh.— He-ga ins the-g old by:force.

— The-Romans

ga ined the-standards .

Adjectives and Verbs which relate to p lenty or

an-Ablative, many also a-Genitive ; as, Love is

both in-honey and g all.— The-soul is never void

shameful to-be-dissolved in-luxury.— To-be ree

-slaves, want:mo ney. These thing s sate me

Opus and usus (need) govern an-Ahlative : as,

are-at-hand, what need is-there of-words f— My-sonhas

twenty minas .

The-Adjectives, dignus (worthy) , indignas (unworthy) , pre ditus (endued) ,fretas (relying) , contentas (contented) , also the Verbdignar (I-deem-w orthy) , governan-Ablative as , The-Museforbid:the-manworthy of ra ise to-die.

— Lentulus is endued with-uncommon—I-indeed

pdeem notmyself worthy of-such an-honour.

The-Ablative of-Price follow sVerbs and Adjectives, signifyingpurchase, sale, or valuation as, I buy not hope a i-a-price.

—Manyou-honour is-sold for-gold.

— The-victory cost the-blood

What is notneedful, is dear at-a-p enny.

These Ablatives, vili, parvo, minimo (for a-little) , nimio (fertoo-much) , magna, p lurimo (fer-a-great-price) , dup lo (for-twiceas-much) , and dimidio (for-half) , are-used by Ellipse, the-wordpretio being

-understood as, Hung er costs little, da intiness a-g reatdeal

The-value of-a-thing generally has a-Genitive, especially those

170 TRANSLATIONS or THE

elliptical (Genitives) , magni, parvi, minimi, p luris, and plurimias, A -wise-man deems pa in (J -no-account. Virtue holds pleasureojlvery-little-worth.

— 0ne eye-witness is of-more ’ value than ten

hearsayPluris, minoris , tanti , quanti , maximi, signify pg

ice as-w ell-as

value : as, He-bought the p leasure-

garden at-as rg e-a -

price as

Pythius wished.

The-Ablative of Difference is-joined to-Adjectives, Adverbs ,and Verbs of Com arative and Superlative meaning : as, The-sunis by

-many times rg er thanthe-nwm .- Doctrines dif ering from

the Cynics by a coat.

Especially the-elliptic Ablatives altero (by-as-much-more) , hoc

(by-this-much) , eo (by-that-much) , que (by-how -much) ,nihilo (bynothing) , and nimio (by-too-much) , dimidio (by-half) , dup lo (bytw ice-as-much) , quanta (by-how -much) , tanto (by-se-much) , p aullo(by-a-little) , multo (by-much) , aliquanto (by-a- freed-deal) as,

R eg ret is so-much heavier as the-fault is g reater .

— Ry-se-much theworstpoet of-all as thou (art) the-bestp atronof-all.

The-Ablative of-Com arisen is-a overned by Comparatives,whether Adjectives or A verbs : as,

'

iloer is p oorer than-

g old,g old

than-virtues . I-think death lighter than-disg race.

Qudm is-om itted elegantly after p lus , amp lias , minus : as, He

infl icted on-me more (than) jive-hundred blows .

These Prepositions govern an-Ablative : a , ab (abs) (from,

after, by, on-the-side-ef) , absque (w ithout) , coram (in-the-presence

of) , de (from , of, concerning) , p alam (in-the-sight-of, w ith-theknow ledge-of) , clam (w ithout-the-know ledge-of), cum (togetherWith, w ith) , ex, e (out-of, of, after, agreeably

-to, on-the-side-of) ,s ine (w ithout) , tenus (as-far-as) , p ro (before, for, according-to) ,p res (before, ow ing-to) to-these add, subter (under) , sup er (upon,concerning) , and in (in, upon, among) , sub (under, just-at) ifstationoccurs.

A -PrepositioninCompositionsometimes governs the-same Casewhich it-governed also out

-ofComposition as, They-thrust-of

'

the

shi sfrom-the-roch.— Now I-address th ee,

erbs of-departing , separating , repelling , removing , and the-like,

governan-Ablative, evenomitting the-Preposition as, Thou-wilt

retirefrom-thy-wide-purcha sed parks and mansion— The-Athenian

peqple drove Phocionfrom-his-country.

o-this-Rule refer the-Ablative after Verbs and Participles

of-origin, such-as are natus , p rognatus , satus , crctus , creatus, ortus

( born, sprung, descended) : as , Atreus g randson of-Tantalus, sonof Pelop s . 0 -thou-sp rung from-the-blood of Gods .

Tenus governs either a-Genitive Plural or an-Ablative, and is

placed after its Case as, The-dewla s hang from the-chinas-f ar-as

the-leg s .— Antiochus was commando to-reignas-far-as Taurus .

Cum is joined to-the-Cases of-Personal Pronouns, and usually

’l 72 TRANSLATIONS or THE

Humus, domus , and rus imitate the-constructionof-towns : as,Cadmus scatters on-the-g round the-teeth, mortal seeds .

L —Armlabroad are of-little-worth, unless there-is safe-counsel at-home.

Go home full, evening comes , g o, she-goats .—I-see the-old-man

returning from-the-country.

III .The-Space of-Distance is-putmore-commonly inthe-Accusa

tive, sometimes inthe-Ablative as, I was -distantfrom Amanas one

day’

sjourney.—The-temple of-zE

‘

sculap ius is-distantfrom Ep idem

rusfive thousand paces (i . e. five Romanm iles) .The-Space of-Progression is put inthe-A ccusative : as, Then

having -dined we-crawl three miles .

The-Space of-Dimensionis-putmost-commonly inthe-Accusad

tive, sometimes in the-Ablative, sometimes in the-Genitive : as,The-walls of Babylonwere 200feet hig h. A -foot—and-a-halflong ,a-footwide. Mahefloors 10feetbroad.

o § 96. E . I. Libet (it-pleaseth) , licet (it-is-lawful) , liquet (it-isclear) , and most Impersonal-Verbs, governa-Dative as, (Let) not

(that) p lease thee which (is) notlawful— Savage bears ag ree amongthemselves . (lit. it-is-ag reed to-savag e bears .)P ig et(it-irketh) , pudet(it-shameth) , p amitet (it-repenteth) , tcedet(it-wearieth) , and miseret (it-pitieth) , govern an-Accusative of

the-person, w ith a-Genitive of-the-thing, or w ith an-Infinitive : as,Thoup itiest others ; for-thyself thou (hast) neither p ity nor shame

‘

(lit. It-p itieth nor shameth thee.) -I am-sorrowed and wearied ofthe-morals of-the-state. It-rep enteth them p artly of-their-crimes;partly of-their-follies . (He) whom it-rep enteth to-have-sinned isalmost innocent.Delectat (it-delighteth) ,juvat (it-pleaseth) , decet(it-beseemeth);

dedecet (it-m isbeseemeth) , op ortet (it-behoveth) , take an-Accusative : as, It-delighteth me to-have-cultivated Helicon in earliest

youth. Least-of-all does-it-beseem an-orator to-be-ang ry. Itd

behoveth a-lawto-be brief.

Pertinet, attinet (it-belongeth, relateth, or concerneth) , take thePre ositionad w ith an-A ccusative as, It-concerneth the-commonwea ih, that-I be-p reserved.

— Let-him-squander, waste, be-ruined,

it-concerneth me nought.Interest (it-imports or concerns) , refert (it-matters or concerns) ,

adm it a-Genitive as, It-imports all-mento-actrightly.

incomposition, what-thing s you-p la ce

-before what.With these Verbs are-jomed instead of-Personal Pronouns, the

Feminine Ablatives mec’

i, tud, sud, nostré , vestrd, the word re

being-understood : as, It-concerns both me and thee (that) thou bewell. Whatmatters-it to-me, whom I-am-a-slave-to

To-these Verbs are-added the-Genitives of-value, tanti, quanti,magni, parvi, p luris as, It-concerns both of-us g reatly that I

should-see you. This avails not more than if-you-should-carry

water to a-sieve

LATIN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 173

Neuter-Verbs are-used Impersonal]y inthe-Passive'

Voice foranypersons as, A -shout-of-dissent-was-uttered by all (that is to say, allshouted-dissent) . What is-doing .

9 there-is-a -standing -still (that isto say, there

- is-a -standing -still by us, or we-stand-still) .

II. AlmosteveryActive Sentence maybe-changed into a

-Passive

(sentence) , so that the_Nom inative of-the-Active Sentence shall

become inthe-Passive an-Ablative of-the-Agcnt.

(A .) If the-Verb of-the-Active Sentence has an-A ccusative of

the-nearer Object, the-Verb in-the-Passive w ill-be Personal the

A ccusative of-the-A ctive passing into the-Nominative of-the

Passive : as,

A cr . The-consul manag ed the-af a ir admirably.

PA SS. The-af a ir was-manag ed admirably by the—consul.

(B.) Ifnot, the-Verb oi-the-Passive Sentencew ill-be Impersonal,and either w ill-stand w ithout a-case, or w ill-governthe

-same case

which it-governed inthe-Active : as,

ACT . The-enemyfought steadily.

PASS. (There was) steadyfighting by the-enemy.

ACT . We need medicine.

PA SS. There-is-a -need by us of-medicine.

Where there-canbe no ambiguity, the-Ablative of-the-Agent issuppressed after Passive Impersonals as, We-g o (itur a nobis)into an-ancientforest.Hence it-appears that-the-same Cases are-governed by Passive

Verbs as byActive, exceptonlythe-A ccusative of-the-nearerObject.Vapulo (I am beaten) , venco (I am sold) , exulo (I am banished),

liceo (I am bid for) ,fio (I am made) , w ith some other-Verbs, are

construed in-a-Passw e sense as, The-witness was-beatenwith-a

stich by the-defendant.—

'

I -had-rather be-p lundered by a-citiz enthan

be-sold by an-enemy.-I-am-tortured lest my

~husband fall by an

incensed enemy.

97 F. I. The-Infinitive w ith the-Gerunds and Supines mak es

the-Substantive of-the-Verb.

The-Infinitive is-joined to-many Verbs and Participles, and in;

poetry to-Adjectives : as, To-envy occurs not to a -wise-man.

— I

seem to-wander through holy groves .— They

-use to-think long who

wish to-p erform great-thing s .— Both well-matched to-sing , and ready

to-answer.

For the-Accusative of-the-Infinitive the-Gerund in dam is-put

after Prepositions : as, A-short time is long enough for living well.

i—The-characters of-boys reveal themselves inp laying .

For the-Genitive the-Gerund indi is-put after Ad'

ectives and

Substantives : as, L am-des irous of-satisfying the-republic. Thw

cydides surpasses all~

iii-shill of-language.

[74 TRANSLATIONS or rHE

For the-Dative the-Gerund indo is-put after some Adjectivesand Verbs : as, Crassus could not be a-matchfor-the-ar me

For the-Ablative the-Gerund in do ~ is~put signigrzin Cause,

Instrument, or Manner, or w ith the-Prepositions, ab, dge, ex, m ,

sum : as, By-doing nothing men learn to-do ill. — J ove we-name

from help ing .

Gerunds (have) an-Active signification but if they-are Transi

tive, their constructionmay be-represented passively, indeed (is)

oftener represented, by the-Participle indus , which thence receivesthe-name of-Gerundive.

The GerundiveConstructionisof-thiS-kind, thatthe Substantiveis-drawn into the-Case of-the-Grerund, w ith which (Case) the-Ccrundive must-agree : as, We-extractfrom-the-earth fire for ag ri

culture.— It-seemed an-opp ortunityf or-making a -revolution.

For signifyingNecessity Passively, the-Gerundive is-used Impersonally in the-Neuter Gender : as

,You must consultfor-the-p ro

perties of-the-citiz ens .- (We) must p ray that (there) be a -sound

mind ina -sound body.

II. The-Supine inum, like an-Accusative, is-put-afterVerbs signifying motion: as, They-come to-see, they

-come that they-may

-be

seenthemselves . We-send to-learn-of the-oracles of-Phoebus .

The-Supine inu is-put, like an-Ablative of respect, both (after)many Adj ectives, and also (after) the-Substantives,as, (Let) nothing shameful to-be-sp oken and seendoors , withinwhich is a -boy.

— Lo ! ill-omenedissues-from the-altars .

III. Participles, Gerunds, and the-Supine inum, govern the

Cases of-their Verbs : as, All having -dared monstrous wickednessand having

-achieved their-daring .

§ 98 . G . Neuter Adjectives of-each Number sometimes are

put Adverbially, especially by poets : as, He-will-be-a -slave forever, who cannot enjoy a-little.

— He-returns backwardfierce, looking

Conjunctions Sociative and Dissociative connect like Cases,Moods, and Tenses : as, He admires the-gates, and the-bustle, and

the-pavement of-the-streets . Virtue can neither be-snatched norstolen-away. Unless a-different principle of-constructioninterfere.

H . Ne the-prohibitive Conjunction is-joined to-an-Imperativeor Subjunctive Mood as, Let-there be no delay (inp erforming )my commands . Lay not the

-blame onme.

These-Conjunctions require the-Subjunctive ut (that) &c.

These Conjunctions take the-Subjunctive or Indicative accord

ing-to the circumstances : quum (when)0 0

These Conjunctions generally take the-Indicative, unless

the-nature of-the-passage require the Subjunctive : quod (that.because) &c .

176 TRANSLATIONS or THE

consonant, (exercetque) and exercises (nullam v im) no power (inProsodia) inProsody.

202. (Omnis diphthongus) Every diphthong (contractaquesyllaba) and contracted syllable (longa est) is long : (ut) as (p rces)a-surety, (hen) alas, (g audens) rejo icing : (coag o) I-com cl (fitc o) becomes 06 o, (nihil) nothing (nil) becomes-nil (bob

i

us) tooxen(pro bovibus is-put

-for bovibus ; (momentum) an-impulse (promovimentam) for movimentam.

(A t) But (tu corripies p ra ) you w ill-shortenp rtc (prceeuntemvocali) going-before a-vowel.

203. (Primaria) Primitives (dant) give (proprium tempus)their-own quantity (Derivatis) to -their-derivatives (sic) thus

(sillizr) a-w illow (format) forms (siiliceta ) w illow -grounds, (pomum)

an-apple omaria) orchards.

(TamenfY et ( in multis) in many-instances (fit aliter) it

happens otherw ise : (sic) thus (drena dret) sand is-dry ; (sic) thus(hbmo est humanas) manis human; (sic) thus (parva lilcerna liZcet)a-little candle shines.

(Nee non) Moreover (Composta) Compound-words (sequuntur)follow (tempus Simplicium) the-quantity of-their-Sim

vples : (sic)

thus (rep iito) I-consider (exstat) comes (a iito) from puto, I-think,(sic) thus (imme

'

mor) unm indful (a me'

mor from mé'

mor, m indful.

(Tamen) Y et (sunt excepta) there-are exceptions (sic) thus(nubo) I marry (formatp ronilba) forms p ronuba , a bridesmaid.

204. (Vocalis) A -vowel (praevia vocali) going-before a-vowel

(corripitur) is-shortened : (ceu) as, (p rincip i’

um) a-beginning°

(prb'

hibe) forb id .

(Sed) But (hinc excipe) except from-this-rule (multa Graeca)

many Greek-words : as, Chaonis, E neas , Clio, Myrtous , Enyo.

(Priscus Genitivus) The-old Genitive (Primes) of-the-first

declension(habebit) w ill-have (a longam) long a : (terrai, aulc'

ii)as-terrai, of-earth, aulai, of-a-hall : (sic) thus (Quinta) the 5thDeclension(formatdie

'

i) makes die'

i, of-a-day : (tamen) but (scribe)

write (re’

i atque rei) rei and ré'

i, of-a-thing , fide

’

i atque fidéi)fidé

'

i andfidé'

i, of-faith.

(Penultima) The last-syllable-but-one (Vocativo) of-the-Vocative-Case (voeis) of-a-w ord (in aius aut eius) ending ina ius or

eius (longa est) is long : (hac lege) by-this rule (sonantur) aresounded (Cat) O-Caius, (Pomp éi) O-Pompeius.

(I verbifio) The-i of-the-verbfio, I-become, (longa est) is long,(nisi) except (cum comes est er) when er follows it : (omnia nunc

fient) all-things w ill-happennow (,fieri qua: p osse negabam) whichI-said could (not) happen.

(Genitivus in ius ) A -Genitive-Case in ius (i dat communem)makes i common: (ut) as (ille) he (illins illiusque facit) makes

illius and illius (sic) so ('

totus) whole, (ct) and (anus) one, (ip se)Self, (que) and (iste) that, (nullus) none, (ct) and (ullus) any

LAT IN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 177

(habent ius iusque) have ins and ius (inthe Genitive) : (alterius)the-Genitive alterius (semper breviat) always shortens i , (producitalius) the-Genitive alius lengthens

-it.

(Nunc Diana) Sometimes Diana (feras agitat) chases beasts,

(nunc) sometimes (dia Diana) div ine D iana (sic) thus (dicimus)w e-say (o

'

he vel (The) 6he or b’

he, oh ! (sed semper e’

heu) but alwayséheu

, alas.

205 . (Vocalis) Any-vow el (crit) w ill-be (longa situ) long byPosition

, (quam ) which (bina consona) two-consonants (sequetur)Shall-follow ; (ceu) as (pallor tristis) sad paleness : (quam) or

which (voce ineadem ) inthe-sam e w ord (j subit) j follow s (x aut

z ) or x or 2 (sic) thus, (Ajax) Ajax, (axis) an-axle, (Ama z on)an-Amaz on.

(Excipe) except (quadrzjugus) yoked-w ith-four-horses, (bijugus)yoked

-w ith-two-horses, (qua: corripiunt i) which Shortenthe-i .

(Vocalis) A -vowel (vi curta sua) short by-its-ownpow er (communis erit) w ill-be common, (si) if (consona muta) a-mute consonant ostponens liquidam sibi) w ith a liquid after it (sequetur)shall-follbw : (sic) thus (rectedices) you-w ill rightly say (lugubremelos) a-mournful melody (vel lug iZbre) or lug ilbre (dup lex)double (sive dii lex) or duplex (Técmessam) Tecmessa (siveTécmessam) or f

‘

écmessam.

(N post g ) Gn (semper dat longam ) alw ays m akes a-longsyllable, (ut) as (cignus) a-lamb (ct) and (ignis) fire : (nee m inus)and likew ise (m post g ) gm ; (quod) which (tegmen) a-covering(ct) and (agmen) a-troop (monstrat) shew s .

(Si) If (altera syllaba) another syllable (diviserit) shall-haved ivided (liquidam muta) the-liquid from -the-mute, (prior) theformer-syllable (longa semper) is-always loner (quod) which (sub0

ruit) he-underm ines, (ab-lue) wash-aw ay, (monstrant) shew .

§ 206 . (Syllaba rima) The-first syllable (Praeteriti gem inati)of-a-redu licated reterperfect (brevis est) is short : (ut) as

(p epuli) -have-driven-aw ay, (didici) I-have-learnt, (fupug i) I

have-pricked, (cecidi) I-have-fallen, (atque) and (ceci i) I-havebeaten.

(Perfecta disyllaba) Preterperfects of-two-syllables (efficiunt)make (prim am longam) the-first-syllable long : (ut) as, (vidi) Ihave-seen, (leg i) I-have-read, (que) and (movi) I-have-moved

(

sed) but (excipis octo) you-except eight : (bibi) I-have -drunk,

(dedi) I-have iven, (fui) I-have-been, (fidi) I-have-cleft, (steti)-have-stood, stiti) I-have -stopped, (tali) I-have-borne, (seidi) Ihave-cut.

(Que) also (Su ina disyllaba) Supines of-two-syllables (riteproducunt) proper y lengthen (primam ) their-first-syllable : (ut)as (visum) to see, (lotum) to-wash, (que) and (motum) to-move

(sed excip is octo) but you-except eight: (citam) to-rouse, (datum)N

( 78 TRANSLATIONS or THE

to-give, (itum) to-go, (litum) to-smear, (ratum) to-think, (ratum)to-throw-down, (satum) to -sow , (situm) to~allow .

§ 207. (Produces) You-w ill-lengthen (pleraque monosyllaba)most words-of-one-syllable, (qualia) such-as (me) me, (ver) 8 ring(InI, b, d, t,) Words-of-one-syllable ending-in l, b, d, t, gorri

piuntur) are shortened : (ut) as (vel) even, (sub) under, (id) that,(et) and (stat) he-stands (es) thou-art (cum compositis) w ith itscompounds, (ut) as (ades) thou-art~present ; (que) and, (ve) or,

(quumque rogat, us) and ne whenit-is-interro ative : (fac) make,

(nee) neither, (an) or, (in) in, (fer) bear, er) through, (ter)thrice, (vir) a-man, (cor) a-heart, (quis) who ? (bis) twice, ( is) he ,(et cis) and cis on-this-Side-of.

208 . (In A ) Words-ending-in A (producuntur) are-made

long : as, (frustra ) in-vain, (que) and (intra) w ithin, (que) and

(para) prepare.

(Sed excipe) But except (casus rectos) Nominative Cases (etquartos) and Accusatives : (quales) such as (musa) the-muse (carmina canit) Sings songs : (silva ) the-woods (resonant Amaryllida )resound Amaryllis : (at ue) and plerosque) mostVocatives, (ut) as (Oresta) (Thyesta) O-Thyestes : (particulas) the particles (eja) ho ! (ita) so, (cumque his) and with these(quia) because : (qua breviant a) which shortena .

209. (Corripiuntur inE) Word s-inE are-made-short : (ceu)as (leg s timete carere) fear to-be-w ithout law .

(Casus) The-Cases (Prima Quinta que) of-the-first and fifthdeclension(requirunt e longam) require e long : (at) as, (Thisbe)Thisbe, (sp ecie) by-appearance : (qua derivantur ab illis) andwords-which are-derived from them : (ut) as (quare) wherefore,(atque) and (hodie) to-day ; (contractaque) and contracted-words

(qualia) such-as (Temp e) Tempe : (Verba in so) Verbs of-the

second-conjugation (mandantia) in-the-Imperative-Mood (prim inumeri) Singular Number : (ut) as (aude) dare-thou : [(sed) but

(scribendi esta qua potestas) we may equallywrite (cavesive cavé)cave or cave, beware] (Adverbia) Adverbs (dueta) derived (eXAd

'

ectivis secunda ) from Adjectives of-the-second-declension,

(ut as (misere) wretchedly: jungantur) let-there-be -added

(ohe) oh (que) and (ferme) generally (que) and (feré) com

mouly.

210. (Producuntur inI) Words-ia I are-made-long, (ceu) as

(dici) to be said, (que) and (orbi) to-a-circle, (que) and (deli)deceits.

(Attamen) But (deme hinc) except from-this-rule (multos Da

tivos) many Datives (atque Vocatives) and Vocatives (Gra corum ) of the Greeks : (ut) as (Thyrsidi) to-Thyrsis, (Phyllidi) toPhyllis, (Chlori) O-Chloris : (deme) except (sieubi) if-any-where,(asoubi) lest-any-where, (nisi) unless, (et) and (quas i) as

-if, (queis

180 TRANSLATIONS or THE

ducitur) is-always lengthened, (atque) and (pes) a-foot (cum com

positis) w ith-its-compounds : (que) and (abies) a-fir-tree, (que)

and (aries ) a-ram , (que) and (Ceres) Ceres.

§ 2 14. (Corripiuntur in Is) Words in Is are-short ; (ceu) as

(diceris) thou-art-said, (utilis ) useful, (ensis) a-sword .

(Obliqui casus plurales) The-oblique-cases plural (excipiuntur)are -excepted, (ut) as (terris) bynlands

, (vobis ) to-you : (etiam)also (persona secunda inprimo numero) the-second-personsingular

(Pra sentis) Present-tense (Quarta ) of-the-Fourth-conjugation,(ut) as (audis) thou-hearest (composita a vis

,sis) the-compounds

of vis thou-w ilt, sis thou-mayst-be ; (ma lis) thou-mayest

-

prefer,

(que) and (nolis) thou-mayst-refuse, (que) and (velis) thou-mayst

w ish . [(Sed ris) but ris (persona secunda) the-second ersonsingular (Pra teriti et Futuri) of-the-Preterperfect and uture

(A ctiva voeis) of the A ctive voice (recte communis habetur) is

properly held common; (as) (feceris ) thou-mayst-have-done, (ad

dideris) thou-mayst-have-added, (tzderis) thou shalt have borne ]

(At produc nom ina) But lengthennouns (queis longa est) whichhave long enultima) the-penultimate (crescentis Genitivi ) of-anincreasing genitive, (ut) as (Samnis) a-Samnite : (itidem ) likew ise(Simois) the-Simois, (que) and (g ratis) freely, (que) and (foris)abroad.

§ 2 15. (Producuntur in os) Words-ih Os are-long, (ut) as

(ventos) w inds (atque) and (sacerdos) a-priest.(Corripienda tamen) But we-must-shorten (qua G ra ci cor

ripiunt) words-which the-Greeks shorten, (ut) as, (Phas idos) of

the-Phasis, (Arg os) A rgos, (ep os) an-epic-poem (sic) so (compos)master-of, (et) and (imp os) powerless, (os) a bone, (exes) boneless.

(Corripiuntur inUs )Words-inUs are-short (ceu) as (tempus)time, (amamus) w e-love, (et) and (intus) w ithin.

(Hinc excipe) Except from -this-rule (casus contractos) thecontracted cases (q

uarta ) of-the-fourth-declension, (ut) as (artus)limbs : (queisque onga est) and nouns-which have long (penultima) the-penultimate (crescentis Genitiv i) of-an-increasing-Genitive : (ut) as (tellus) earth, (que) and (incus ) an-anvil, (juventus)youth, (atque) and (senectus) old-age (producta a Gra cis) wordslengthened by the

-Greeks, (ut) as (Sapp hils) of-Sappho, (a ue)and (Melampus) Melampus, (atque) and (Iesus) J esus, (nome

t

risaname (venerandum) to-be-adored (piis cunctis) by-all pious

persons.

(Corrip iuntur inYs) Words inY S are-short : (ut) as, (chelys)

gglute, (chlamys) a mantle, (0 thrys) mount-Othrys, (E rinnys) aury.

Not. (Ea syllaba) That syllable (quam) which (regula nulla) norule (facit) makes (longam brevemve) long or short, (ducittemp us)derives its

-

quantity (ab auctorum scriptis) from-the-writings of

m tnors.

LAT IN RULES AND EXAMPLES. 18 1

216. 1. Call a-raising of-the-voice inuttering syllables, Arsis ,( Ictus accompanies this) and ou-thez-other-hand a-dropping of

-the

voice is (called) Thesis . A -Footis a-certainsuccessionof-syllables,and R hythm a-certain successionof-Feet. In-the-works-of poetsthe-name of-Rhythm is a Verse : and a-certain order of-Versescall M easure or M etre : also a-certain part of-a-Verse is-calledMetre.

217 . 2 . A -long syllable follow ing a-short is called Iambus

(u but if a-long-syllable goes

-before a short-one, that (is) a

Trochee u ) a-Pyrrhich w ill consist of-two short-syllables (u u ) :

a-Sp ondee w ill consist of-two long-syllables a-Dactyl is

formed by-a-long and two short-syllables

-v v ) and an-Anap cest

by-one long after tw o short-syllables (u u Add to-these a Tri

brach formed by-three short-syllables. (v v v ) .

You-w ill-saythat-a-Rhythm , which a-Thesis begins, is-ascending ;

a-specimenof-which-kind thy verse, O-Iambus, w ill-give . Ou-the

other-hand, if-it-begins w ith Arsis, you-w ill-say it

-is-descending ;thou-makest such, O-Dactyl, and thou, O-Trochee.

One foot makes a-metre inDactylic verse, and two-feet inothersThat verse which w ants one syllable for

-completing its-m etres,

is-called Catalectic. That which w ants tw o syllables for-completing

its metres is-called Brachycatalectic. A -verse which (has) one syllable over, when-its-metres are-complete, is

-calledHyp ercata lectic.

ThatVerse, which has-nothing wanting or too-much, being-smooth

and round, is-called A catalectic.

2 18 . Scansion, which Figures adjustby-various art, distributesa-Verse according to

-feet.

A . Synalap ha (Elision) cuts-ofi'

a-Vow el atthe-end of-a-w ord, it

there-shall-be a-vow el atthe-beginning of-the-follow ing word (as)I-love Phyllis before other-women for she-wep t

that-I was

i «r.”

O

Sometimes H iatus v iplates the-law of-Synaloepha : (as) Thrice

they-endeavoured to -p lace 0 ssa onA -follow ing vowel never elides heu, 0 ,

and ah (alas l) .E cthlip sis cuts off a

-vowel and m from the-end, if there-shall-be

a-vow el at the-beginning of-the-follow ing w ord : (as) 0 the-cares

of-men, 0 what-great emp tiness there-is inthing s .

2 19 . C. One-syllable wrought out-of two is-called Syna resis,

as deest (it is w anting) , dein (next) , aureos (golden) , alvearia

(hives) , Thesei (of Theseus) Show .

In-the-works-ofpoets I and U sometimes take the-privileges of

consonants : (as) E ridanus hing of-rivers . The-wall tottersfromthe-battering -ram . Knees tremble. And Serians comb lig htfl eeces .

D . But one-syllable divided into tw o is-called D ia resis, which

Na iades and yellow -haired Sue’

vi Show to-you.

U is-putfor V you-w ill-see siliias (woods) and soliiit (he-hath

loosed) .

182 TRANSLATIONS onTHE

§ 220. E . Ca sura ends words before the-end of-feet: (as) YeLights which lead i ii

-heaventhe-g liding year .

A -vowel, which nature has-made short, sometimes is-made longinArsis, Ca sura and Ictus helping : (as) Poring -over the-breasts

he-consults the-p alp itating entra ils .

"

F. Dialysis (Incision) separates both a-w ord and foot at-once

(as) Ye-Lig hts which lead in-heaventhe-g liding year .

Not. The-last syllable of-a-verse is-held common.

§22 1. The-Hexameter is-formed by-six feet : of-these the-fifth

is a-dactyl a-spondee is-

put ln-the-sixth place : and either

-of-the